Ram Promaster City: Download The Most Up-To-Date Owner'S Manual, Radio and Warranty Books

2021 RAM PROMASTER CITY
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
U.S. CANADA
`
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
RAM PROMASTER CITY
MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
20 21 OWNER’ S M ANUAL
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Second Edition
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 21_VM_OM_EN_USC
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving
itself to install them on products previously manufactured. is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
substitution therefore. while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. reference for common questions.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway transportation.
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except WARNING
as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 6 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 10 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 40 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING .................................................................................................53 4
5 MULTIMEDIA .................................................................................................................................77 5
6 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 129 6

7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ..................................................................................................... 167 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................184 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 227
9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ..................................................................................................... 233
10
11 INDEX ............................................................................................................................................. 237
11
INTRODUCTION UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ........................22 INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............... 32

Introducing Voice Recognition.........................22 Storage .............................................................32
SYMBOLS KEY...........................................................7
Basic Voice Commands ...................................23 USB Control — If Equipped ..............................33
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS..............................7 Get Started .......................................................23 Power Outlets ..................................................33
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.............7 Additional Information .....................................23 WINDOWS ............................................................. 35
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.................................................8 MIRRORS ...............................................................23 Power Window Controls — If Equipped ..........35
Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................23 Automatic Window Features ...........................35
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Vanity Mirror .....................................................24 Power Windows System Initialization .............36
KEYS ....................................................................... 10 Outside Mirrors ................................................24 Rear Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped ..36
Key Fob .............................................................10 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................25 Window Bar Grates — If Equipped ..................36
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 11 Multifunction Lever ..........................................25 Wind Buffeting .................................................36
IGNITION SWITCH ................................................. 12 Headlights ........................................................25 HOOD ...................................................................... 37
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .... 13 Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — Opening.............................................................37
To Arm The System ..........................................13 If Equipped .......................................................26 Closing ..............................................................37
To Disarm The System .....................................13 High/Low Beam Switch....................................26 CARGO AREA FEATURES...................................... 38
Rearming Of The System .................................13 Flash-To-Pass ..................................................26 Rear Cargo Tie-Downs .....................................38
Security System Manual Override ...................13 Parking Lights ..................................................26 ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED................................. 38
DOORS ................................................................... 13 Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay ..................26
Power Door Locks ............................................13 Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
Auto Unlock Doors............................................14 Turn Signals......................................................26 INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sliding Side Door ..............................................14 Lane Change Assist..........................................27
INTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................27 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER......................................... 40
Double Rear Swing Doors................................15
Courtesy/Interior Lights...................................27 Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................41
Child-Protection Door Lock System.................16
WIPERS AND WASHERS .......................................28 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ....................... 41
STEERING WHEEL.................................................. 17
Front Wiper Operation......................................28 Location And Controls......................................41
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ...................17
Rear Wiper Operation — If Equipped...............29 Change Engine Oil — If Equipped ....................42
SEATS ..................................................................... 17
CLIMATE CONTROLS .............................................29 Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items.........43
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) ...................17 TRIP COMPUTER.................................................... 44
Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped .....................19 Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ..........................................................29 Trip Button ........................................................44
Heated Seats — If Equipped ............................20
Operating Tips ..................................................31 Trip Functions ..................................................45
Head Restraints ...............................................20
Values Displayed..............................................45
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................... 45 CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED .......................61 TRAILER TOWING .................................................. 69
Red Warning Lights ..........................................46 To Activate ........................................................62 Common Towing Definitions............................69
Yellow Warning Lights ......................................48 To Set A Desired Speed ...................................62 Trailer Hitch Classification...............................70
Green Indicator Lights......................................51 To Vary The Speed Setting...............................62 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Blue Indicator Lights ........................................51 To Accelerate For Passing ...............................62 Weight Ratings) ................................................71
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ........ 51 To Resume Speed............................................63 Trailer And Tongue Weight .............................71
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) To Deactivate ...................................................63 Towing Requirements .....................................71
Cybersecurity ....................................................52 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — Towing Tips ......................................................73
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE IF EQUIPPED ...........................................................63 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
PROGRAMS ............................................................ 52 ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors .............63 MOTORHOME) ....................................................... 74
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts .................64 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
STARTING AND OPERATING ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure Vehicle ..............................................................74
STARTING THE ENGINE ........................................ 53 Indications ........................................................65 Recreational Towing — Automatic
Cleaning The ParkSense Rear Park Assist Transmission ....................................................74
Automatic Transmission ..................................53
System ..............................................................65 DRIVING TIPS ......................................................... 75
Normal Starting ................................................53
ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..........................75
Cold Weather Operation .................................53
Precautions.......................................................65 Driving Through Water ....................................75
Extended Park Starting ....................................53
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .................66
If Engine Fails To Start .....................................54
After Starting.....................................................54 REFUELING THE VEHICLE .....................................67 MULTIMEDIA
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED............ 54 VEHICLE LOADING .................................................68 UCONNECT SYSTEMS ........................................... 77
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .......... 55 Vehicle Certification Label...............................68 CYBERSECURITY ................................................... 77
PARKING BRAKE .................................................. 55 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .............68 UCONNECT SETTINGS .......................................... 78
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ..................68 Uconnect 3/3 NAV Settings ............................78
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .............................. 56
Tire Size ............................................................68 UCONNECT INTRODUCTION.................................. 87
Key Ignition Park Interlock...............................57
Rim Size ............................................................68
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Identifying Your Radio......................................87
Inflation Pressure.............................................68
System .............................................................57 Safety And General Information......................89
Curb Weight ......................................................68
9-Speed Automatic Transmission ..................57 UCONNECT MODES ............................................... 90
Overloading.......................................................68
POWER STEERING ................................................ 61 Radio Mode ......................................................90
Loading .............................................................69
Power Steering Fluid Check ............................61 Media Mode .....................................................97
Phone Mode ....................................................99
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED..................109 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Operating Navigation Mode — If Equipped .. 109 Outside The Vehicle ...................................... 165
SCHEDULED SERVICING ....................................184
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — Exhaust Gas .................................................. 165
Maintenance Plan......................................... 185
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................126 Carbon Monoxide Warnings ........................ 166
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................188
Radio Operation ............................................ 127 Engine Compartment — 2.4L ....................... 188
Media Mode................................................... 127 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Checking Oil Level......................................... 189
RAM TELEMATICS - IF EQUIPPED ......................127 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS......................... 167 Adding Washer Fluid .................................... 189
Ram Telematics General Information.......... 127 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................ 167 Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 189
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .....128 Preparations For Jacking ............................. 167 Pressure Washing ......................................... 190
Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 128 Jack Location — If Equipped ......................... 168 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .....................................190
Removing The Spare Tire — If Equipped...... 168 Engine Oil....................................................... 190
SAFETY Jacking Instructions ...................................... 170 Engine Oil Filter ............................................. 191
SAFETY FEATURES ..............................................129 Vehicles With Alloy Wheels........................... 173 Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............................... 191
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS).. 129 Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers ........ 174 Air Conditioner Maintenance........................ 191
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...... 130 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ................... 175 Body Lubrication ........................................... 192
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ..........................132 Tire Service Kit Storage ................................ 175 Windshield Wiper Blades.............................. 192
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .... 132 Tire Service Kit Usage................................... 175 Exhaust System ............................................ 193
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ....................135 JUMP STARTING .................................................. 177 Cooling System.............................................. 194
Occupant Restraint Systems ........................ 135 Preparations For Jump Starting ................... 177 Brake System ............................................... 196
Important Safety Precautions....................... 135 Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 178 Automatic Transmission .............................. 197
Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 136 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .......................... 179 Upfitter Connectors — If Equipped ............... 198
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 142 IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE ................ 180 Fuses.............................................................. 199
Child Restraints ............................................. 150 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE.............................. 180 Bulb Replacement ........................................ 205
SAFETY TIPS .........................................................163 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............................. 181
Transporting Passengers .............................. 163 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ......................... 182
Transporting Pets .......................................... 163 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside (EARS) .................................................................. 183
The Vehicle ................................................... 163 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ........................ 183
TIRES .....................................................................209 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

Tire Safety Information ................................. 209 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ........ 227 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
Tires — General Information ........................ 216
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................... 227 FOR YOUR VEHICLE ............................................233
Tire Types....................................................... 219
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 233
Spare Tires — If Equipped............................. 220
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................. 227 Prepare A List ................................................ 233
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ......................... 222
Torque Specifications ................................... 227 Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 233
Tire Chains and Traction Devices ................ 222
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ........................................ 228 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................233
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................. 222
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION 2.4L Engine ................................................... 228 FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 233
Reformulated Gasoline................................. 229 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .............. 233
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ....................223
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ........................ 229 Mexico............................................................ 234
Treadwear ...................................................... 223
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ......... 229 Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............... 234
Traction Grades ............................................. 223
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 229 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Temperature Grades ..................................... 223
MMT In Gasoline ........................................... 229 Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)......................... 234
STORING THE VEHICLE .......................................224
Materials Added To Fuel............................... 230 Service Contract ........................................... 234
BODYWORK..........................................................224 WARRANTY INFORMATION................................234
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 230
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 224 MOPAR® PARTS .................................................235
FLUID CAPACITIES .............................................. 231
Body And Underbody Maintenance.............. 224
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS................... 231 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................235
Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 225
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............... 232 In The 50 United States And
INTERIORS ...........................................................225
Washington, D.C............................................ 235
Seats And Fabric Parts.................................. 225
In Canada ...................................................... 235
Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 225
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................235
Leather Surfaces ........................................... 226
GENERAL INFORMATION....................................236
Glass Surfaces .............................................. 226
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your new Ram. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This Owner’s Manual has
been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented
by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details
of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time.
Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. Be sure
you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting (if equipped). Learn how your
vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For
this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized
dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar® parts, and care about
your satisfaction.
SYMBOLS KEY VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

These statements are against operating The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
WARNING! procedures that could result in a collision, bodily special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body 1
injury and/or death. builders. U.S. residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section 2.1.C.
Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty
These statements are against procedures that
CAUTION! Information. Such equipment includes video monitors, DVD/Blu-ray™,
could result in damage to your vehicle.
heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on these
A suggestion which will improve installation, items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
NOTE: operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the conversion/
result in damage.
camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle. If these
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier instructions are missing, please contact an authorized dealer for assistance in
TIP:
use of the product or functionality. obtaining replacement documents from the applicable manufacturer.
PAGE REFERENCE For information on the Body Builder’s Guide refer to www.rambodybuilder.com.
ARROW This website contains dimensional and technical specifications for your
Follow this reference for additional information on
vehicle. It is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer's technical support. For
a particular feature.
service issues, contact an authorized dealer.
FOOTNOTE VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

Supplementary and relevant information WARNING!
pertaining to the topic.
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY Red Warning Lights

Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
Ú page 47
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
each symbol Ú page 45.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and Ú page 47
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 47
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 46 Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 48
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 46 Transmission Fault Warning Light
Ú page 48
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 46 Engine Oil Level Warning Light
Ú page 48
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 47
Yellow Warning Lights
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 47
Ú page 48
Yellow Warning Lights Green Indicator Lights
Low Fuel Warning Light Turn Signal Indicator Lights 1

Ú page 48 Ú page 51
Generic Warning Light Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light Front Fog Indicator Light
Vehicle Security Warning Light Cruise Control Indicator Light

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)

Ú page 49 Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning Light
Ú page 51
Ú page 50
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light

Ú page 50
10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS To Lock/Unlock The Doors
Push and release the unlock button to unlock all
KEY F OB doors (on passenger vehicles and U.S. cargo
vehicles) or unlock the front two doors (Canada
Your vehicle uses a key start ignition system which
cargo vehicles). To lock the doors, push and
supports Remote Keyless Entry (RKE). The key fob
release the lock button once. The doors can also
allows you to lock or unlock the doors from
be locked and unlocked manually by using the
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The
mechanical key.
key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system. The key fob also contains When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
an integrated mechanical key, which can be flash. When the doors are locked, the turn signals
accessed by pushing the mechanical key release will flash and the horn will chirp (if activated
button. through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 78). If a
door is open when the lock button is pushed, the
NOTE:
Key Fob With Integrated Mechanical Key turn signal lights will flash at an increased rate to
The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
indicate that a door is still open.
vehicle if it is located next to a mobile phone,
1 — Mechanical Key Release Button
laptop or other electronic device; these devices
may block the key fob’s wireless signal 2 — Driver/Passenger Unlock Button
Ú page 236. 3 — Lock Button
4 — Cargo Lock/Unlock Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 11
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob 3. Take out the battery case. Remove and
replace the battery observing its polarity. WARNING!
The recommended replacement battery is
CR2032. 4. Refit the battery case inside the key fob and  Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
turn the screw to lock it into place. and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
NOTE: unattended.
 Customers are recommended to use a battery
WARNING!  Always remember to place the ignition in the 2
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original OFF position.
 The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
OEM coin battery dimensions. battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
 Perchlorate Material – special handling may chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is Duplication of keys may be performed at an
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns authorized dealer. The VIN is required for
perchlorate. in just two hours and can lead to death. authorized dealer replacement of keys.
1. Push the mechanical key release button and  If you think a battery may have been swal-
NOTE:
release the mechanical key to access the lowed or placed inside any part of the body, Only keys that have been programmed to the
battery case screw located on the side of the seek immediate medical attention. vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle.
key fob. Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a
 Keep new and used batteries away from chil- vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other
2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the key dren. If the battery compartment does not vehicle. When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
fob using a small screwdriver. close securely, stop using the product and system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to
keep it away from children. an authorized dealer.
Programming And Requesting Additional SENTRY KEY

Key Fobs The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
Programming the key fob may be performed by an unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
authorized dealer. engine. The system does not need to be armed or
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
NOTE: whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to The system uses ignition keys which have an
another vehicle. embedded electronic chip (transponder) to
Key Fob Screw Location prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can

be used to start and operate the vehicle.
IGNITION SWITCH WARNING!
If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is 1. Place the gear selector in PARK.  Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the trans-
placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, it 2. Rotate the key to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) mission into PARK, apply the parking brake, and
indicates that there is a problem with the position. remove the key fob from the vehicle. When
electronics. leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. In
3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock case you switch off the vehicle and the trans-
cylinder. mission is not in PARK, a warning message will
CAUTION!
appear on the cluster which suggests you to
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not shift the transmission into PARK and, then, you
compatible with some aftermarket Remote can remove the key within 15 seconds. If 15
Starting systems. Use of these systems may seconds expire, you have to rotate the key from
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position to the MAR
security protection. (ACC/ON/RUN) position and come back to the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position in order to remove
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have the key.
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
NOTE: access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
A key which has not been programmed is also dren to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous
Ignition Switch Positions
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the for a number of reasons. A child or others could
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle 1 — AVV (START) be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
Ú page 236. 2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) be warned not to touch the parking brake,
3 — STOP (OFF/LOCK) brake pedal or the gear selector.
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION! TO ARM THE SYSTEM If the condition which initiated the alarm is still
present, the system will ignore that condition and
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always The Vehicle Security system will arm when you use monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the the key fob to lock the doors. If a door or the hood
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. is not properly shut, the alarm system will not be SECURITY S YSTEM MANUAL O VERRIDE
armed.
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock 2
NOTE: TO DISARM T HE S YSTEM the doors using the manual door lock.
When opening the driver’s door with the key in the
ignition and the ignition placed in the STOP (OFF/
Use the key fob to unlock the door and disarm the
system.
DOORS
LOCK) position, a chime will sound to remind you to
remove the key. The Vehicle Security system will also disarm if a POWER D OOR L OCKS
programmed Sentry Key is inserted into the
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ignition switch. To exit the alarm mode, push the
key fob unlock button, or insert a programmed
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle Sentry Key into the ignition switch.
doors and ignition for unauthorized operation. The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
When the Vehicle Security system is activated, your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
interior switches for door locks are disabled. where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
The system provides both audible and visible of the previously described arming sequences has
signals. Every intrusion attempt causes six occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm
continuous alarm cycles. Every alarm cycle lasts for regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
30 seconds. For 26 seconds, the horn will sound, If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
and the turn signal lights will flash. For four alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Door Lock/Unlock Switch
seconds, it will pause. After a maximum of 10 alarm Security system.
cycles, only the turn signal lights will flash until the The doors can be locked or unlocked from inside
next alarm activation. REARMING O F T HE SYSTEM the vehicle by using the door lock/unlock switch.
 To lock the doors, push down on the switch.
If the system has not been disabled, the Vehicle
Security system will rearm itself after the  To unlock the doors, pull up on the switch.
15 additional minutes of turn signal lights flashing.
AUTO UNLOCK D OORS Opening/Unlocking With A Key Fob In the Horn activation settings after a key fob lock
Canadian Cargo Vehicle — If Equipped command can be adjusted manually through the
This feature unlocks both front doors (on Canada Uconnect system Ú page 78.
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
cargo vehicles), or all doors (on passenger and U.S.
to unlock the front two doors. Push and release the Locking With The Mechanical Key In Passenger
cargo vehicles) when the driver door is opened.
cargo unlock button on the key fob once to unlock Vehicle
NOTE: the passenger/cargo area (side lateral sliding Push the mechanical key release button to expose
If the front passenger door, or the rear or side door doors and rear doors). The turn signal lights will the mechanical key, insert the key into the driver
is opened, only the rear or side door is unlocked. flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. door exterior lock cylinder and turn the key
SLIDING SIDE D OOR Unlocking With The Mechanical Key In Passenger clockwise to lock all doors.
Vehicle Locking With The Mechanical Key In Cargo Vehicle
On cargo versions, the sliding side door is fitted
Push the mechanical key release button to expose Push the mechanical key release button to expose
with a spring-loaded latch that stops the door from
the mechanical key, insert the key into the driver the mechanical key, insert the key into the driver
opening any farther. To lock the door in place,
door exterior lock cylinder and turn the key door exterior lock cylinder and turn the key
simply push the door as far as it will go; to release
counterclockwise to unlock all doors. clockwise to lock the front doors. Insert the key into
it, pull forward firmly.
Unlocking With The Mechanical Key In Cargo the rear door exterior lock cylinder and turn the key
Opening And Closing From Outside The Vehicle clockwise to lock the rear doors.
Vehicle
Push the mechanical key release button to expose Closing And Locking From Outside
Opening/Unlocking With A Key Fob In the the mechanical key and insert the key into the Grab the side door handle and push towards the
Passenger Vehicle And U.S. Cargo Vehicle — driver door exterior lock cylinder and turn the key front of the vehicle. Once the side door is secured
If Equipped counterclockwise to unlock the front doors. Insert in the full closed position, use one of the prior
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob the key into the rear door exterior lock cylinder and locking methods to lock the sliding side doors.
to unlock all doors. Push and release the cargo turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the rear
unlock button on the key fob to unlock only the rear doors. Opening And Closing From The Inside
cargo doors. To open one of the sliding side doors, Closing/Locking With A Key Fob Opening:
pull the handle out from the bottom, then slide the Pull the interior door handle to unlock the door,
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to
door towards the rear of the vehicle until it locks then pull the handle and slide the door towards the
lock all doors, including the cargo area (side lateral
into place and cannot go any farther. The turn rear of the vehicle until it can go no farther.
sliding doors and rear doors). The turn signal lights
signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
will flash to acknowledge the lock signal.
signal.
Closing: The device is released and the doors can be

Pull the interior door handle to release the door opened as follows:
and then push it towards the front of the vehicle. If the power is restored:
Key Emergency Lock (KEL) Device  By remote control.
The sliding side doors are provided with a device  Opening a front door by inserting the key into 2
for locking all the doors using an emergency lock in the key cylinder.
case of a power fault. The device is located on the If the power is not restored:
rear of the sliding door.
 Opening the driver side door by mechanical key
The device can be engaged with the sliding side and the other doors (passenger's side and
doors open in one of the following positions: sliding side door) by pulling the inner handle. Rear Door Check Strap Location
 KEL Device not engaged (doors unlocked) If the child lock was engaged and the previously To open them wider to an angle of 180 degrees,
 KEL Device engaged (insert the ignition key described locking procedure was carried out, push the locking device (one on each side) and
blade into the lock and rotate clockwise), doors operating the internal handle will not open the door simultaneously open the doors. The rear door
locked but will only realign the door lock knob. To open the check strap will automatically re-engage when the
door, the outside handle must be pulled. The door door is closed.
lock/unlock button is not disabled by the Using the key fob, you can do the following:
engagement of the emergency lock.
 For cargo versions with swing door/cargo doors:
DOUBLE R EAR S WING D OORS centrally unlock the load compartment (sliding
side doors + rear swing doors), centrally lock all
The rear double swing doors are fitted through a
the doors.
fastening system which stops them when they
reach an opening angle of approximately  For versions with swing door: local unlocking/
90 degrees. locking.
Key Emergency Lock Device

Opening/Closing The First Swing Door CHILD-P ROTECTION DOOR LOCK To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door
From The Outside Lock System
SYSTEM
To open the door, turn the key in the lock or push 1. Open the rear door.
This system prevents the sliding side doors from
the cargo unlock button on the key fob and then 2. Insert the tip of the mechanical key into the
being opened from the inside. The child locks are
pull the exterior handle to the left. To close the lock and rotate to the lock or unlock position.
located on the rear of the sliding side doors.
door, turn the key in the lock or push the lock 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear
button on the key fob. The child locks can only be engaged/disengaged
door.
with the sliding side door open.
Emergency Opening Of The First Swing
The device remains engaged even if the doors are
Door From The Inside
unlocked remotely. This system prevents the
From inside the vehicle, use the interior door sliding side doors from being opened from the
release mechanism located on the left rear trim inside.
panel.
Opening The Second Swing Door WARNING!
After having opened the first door, pull the handle Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
located on the door face toward the rear of the Remember that the rear doors can only be
vehicle. opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
Child Lock System
NOTE:
For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged,
manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked
position, roll down the window, and open the door
using the outside door handle.
STEERING WHEEL WARNING! MANUAL A DJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)

The front driver and passenger seats can be
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
adjusted forward and rearward, and (if equipped),
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column driving with the steering column unlocked, could may be reclined and the height and lumbar can be
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen adjusted.
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. 2
or shorten the steering column. The steering Failure to follow this warning may result in
column control is located on the steering column, serious injury or death. WARNING!
below the turn signal lever.  Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
SEATS result in loss of control which could cause a
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system collision and serious injury or death.
of the vehicle.  Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
WARNING! Serious injury or death could result from a
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside poorly adjusted seat belt.
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Steering Column Control  Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
To unlock the steering column, push the steering vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
column control downward. To tilt the steering seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
column, move the steering wheel upward or areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the killed.
steering column, pull the steering wheel outward  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering and using a seat belt properly.
column in position, pull the steering column
control up until fully engaged.
Forward And Rearward Adjustment Height Adjustment — If Equipped Recliner Adjustment

The adjustment bar is at the front of the seat, near The height adjustment lever is located on the The recliner knob is on the rear outboard side of
the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat center outboard side of the seat. Lift up or push the seat. To recline the seatback, rotate the knob
forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat down on the front lever to adjust the front of the rearward without leaning back. To return the
is in the desired position. Then, using body seat up or down. seatback to its normal upright position, lean
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat forward, rotate the knob forward until the seatback
to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. is in the upright position.
Height Adjustment Lever
Adjustment Bar Recliner Knob

Lumbar Support — If Equipped 2. Slowly fold down the seatback.

WARNING!
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the 3. Pull forward on the lower release lever located
amount of lumbar support. The lumbar control  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that on the lower outboard side of seat and lift the
knob is located on the rear upper outboard side of the shoulder belt is no longer resting against seat for extended cargo space.
the seatback. Rotate the control forward to your chest. In a collision you could slide under
increase and rearward to decrease the desired the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally 2
amount of lumbar support. injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle
is parked.
FOLDING REAR SEAT — I F EQUIPPED

To provide additional storage area, each rear seat
can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo
space.
1. Locate the release lever (upper outboard side
of seat), and lift it upward until the seatback Seat Release Lever
releases.
Lumbar Control Knob
WARNING!
 Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could
be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
vehicle is parked. Extended Cargo Space
(Continued) Seatback Release Lever
4. Reverse order for original setting.
HEATED S EATS — IF E QUIPPED NOTE: HEAD R ESTRAINTS

 This feature is only available with the ignition
The controls for the front heated seats are located Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
key in MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
on the lower outboard side of the seat. injury by restricting head movement in the event of
 Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
within two to five minutes. so that the top of the head restraint is located
above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
 Persons who are unable to feel pain to the WARNING!
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,  All occupants, including the driver, should not
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical the head restraints are placed in their proper
condition must exercise care when using the positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low injury in the event of a crash.
temperatures, especially if used for long
Heated Seat Control Button periods of time.  Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
Push the switch once to turn on the heated seats.  Do not place anything on the seat or seatback with the head restraints improperly adjusted
The LED on the switch illuminates when the heated that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or removed could cause serious injury or
seat is on. Push the switch a second time to shut or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to death in the event of a collision.
the heating elements off. overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Adjustment Rear Adjustment — If Equipped

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the The outboard and center head restraints are
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push adjustable and removable. To raise the head
the adjustment button, located on the base of the restraint, push and hold the adjustment button,
head restraint, and push downward on the head located on the base of the head restraint and pull
restraint. upward on the head restraint. To lower the head 2
restraint, push and hold the adjustment button,
and push downward on the head restraint till the
desired height is reached.
WARNING! Center Head Restraint

ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in 1 — Release Button
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. 2 — Adjustment Button
Follow the reinstallation instructions above prior
to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING!
Front Head Restraint A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious injury
1 — Release Button
or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always
2 — Adjustment Button securely stow removed head restraints in a
location outside the occupant compartment.
Outboard Head Restraint

1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
Front Removal Rear Removal — If Equipped UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION

To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it To remove the rear head restraints, push the
can go then push the release button and the release button and adjustment button while I NTRODUCING V OICE RECOGNITION
adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling upward on the whole assembly. To reinstall
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head the headrest, put the head restraint posts into the
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes while pushing the release button and
Commands and tips you need to know to control
holes and push downward. Then adjust the head adjustment button. Then adjust it to the
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
restraint to the appropriate height. appropriate height.
WARNING! WARNING!
 A loose head restraint thrown forward in a  A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head restraints Always securely stow removed head restraints
in a location outside the occupant compart- in a location outside the occupant compart-
ment. ment.
 ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in  ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above Follow the reinstallation instructions above Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Voice Recognition
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat. seat.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS MIRRORS

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
I NSIDE REARVIEW M IRROR
Push the VR button . After the beep, say: Manual Mirror — If Equipped
 “Cancel” to stop a current voice session. The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, 2
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
 “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice on the view through the rear window.
Commands.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
 “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again. reduced by moving the small control under the
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice Uconnect Voice Command Buttons mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the
Recognition system’s status. 1 — Push To Mute vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in
the day position (toward the windshield).
GET S TARTED 2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call,
Send, Or Receive A Text
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate 3 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, And Navigation
your Voice Recognition system.
4 — Push To End Call
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
 Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise
ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION
that may impact recognition. © 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
 Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
while facing straight ahead. Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
 Each time you give a Voice Command, first push
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Manual Mirror Adjustment
the VR button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command. For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
 You can interrupt the help message or system
or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a DriveUconnect.ca (Canada) Ú page 236.
Voice Command from the current category.
VANITY MIRROR Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
The driver and passenger sun visors are located on The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for The door mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to
the headliner, near the front windshield. The sun additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to be folded forward or rearward to help avoid
visor can be rotated downward or up against the block out the sun. damage.
door glass. Your vehicle may be equipped with a 1. Fold down the sun visor.
courtesy mirror located on the passenger sun 2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
visor.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview
mirror to extend it.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center
of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the
optimal view.
WARNING! Folding Mirrors
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside CAUTION!

convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown) It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the
than they really are. Relying too much on side
convex mirrors could cause you to collide with full rearward position to resist damage when
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside entering a car wash or a narrow location.
mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
Manual Outside Mirrors — If Equipped

From the inside of the vehicle, use the control lever
to adjust the mirror.
Power Mirror Controls Multifunction Lever

1 — Neutral Position HEADLIGHTS
2 — Driver Mirror Select Position
To turn on the headlights, turn the end of the
Manual Mirror Control Lever 3 — Passenger Mirror Select Position
multifunction lever to the headlight position. When
4 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch the headlight switch is on, the parking lights,
Power Outside Mirrors — If Equipped taillights, license plate light, clearance lights and
The power mirror controls are located on the mirror
flag trim above the driver’s door trim panel. To EXTERIOR LIGHTS instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn
off the headlights, turn the end of the multifunction
adjust a mirror, turn the control knob toward the lever back to the O (Off) position.
left or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the MULTIFUNCTION L EVER
control knob in the direction you want the mirror to The multifunction lever controls the operation of
move. When you are finished adjusting the mirror, the headlights, parking lights, turn signals,
turn the control to the center (neutral) position to headlight beam selection and the passing lights.
prevent accidental mirror movements. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of
NOTE: the steering column.
Operation of the power mirrors is only available
with the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position.
DAYTIME RUNNING L IGHTS (DRLS) — FLASH-TO-P ASS Deactivation

I F EQUIPPED You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering
wheel and hold it for more than two seconds.
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will come on by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
whenever the ignition is in the ON position, the This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, FOG LIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED
headlight switch is off, and a turn signal has not and remain on, until the lever is released.
The fog light switch is located on the center stack
been activated. PARKING LIGHTS of the instrument panel, just above the climate
To activate the DRLs, rotate the end of the controls.
These lights can only be turned on with the ignition
multifunction lever to the O (Off) position. Push the switch once to turn the fog
in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position or removed.
NOTE: Move the end of the multifunction lever to O (off) lights on. Push the switch a second time
 For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime position, and then to the headlight position. to turn the fog lights off.
Running Lights will automatically deactivate The indicator light telltale in the instrument panel NOTE:
when the front fog lights are turned on. comes on. The lights stay on until the next ignition If the vehicle’s ignition is turned off, the fog lights
 The low beams and side/taillights will not be on cycle is performed. will also turn off.
with DRLs.
FOLLOW ME H OME/HEADLIGHT DELAY TURN SIGNALS
 In certain markets, the DRLs can be
programmed on or off through the Uconnect When this feature is selected, the driver can Move the multifunction lever up or down to
system Ú page 78. choose to have the headlights remain on for a activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side
preset period of time after the engine is turned off. of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
 On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
operation.
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side Activation
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on Remove the key or turn the ignition to the STOP NOTE:
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when (OFF/LOCK) position, and pull the multifunction If either light remains on and does not flash, or
the hazard warning lights are activated). lever toward the steering wheel within two there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
minutes. Each time the lever is pulled, the outside light bulb.
HIGH/LOW B EAM S WITCH activation of the lights will be extended by
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering 30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be
wheel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pull extended to a maximum of 210 seconds.
the multifunction lever again to turn the low beams
back on.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST In auto-mode, the light comes on automatically

when you open the sliding doors and the rear swing
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, doors, and goes out when you close them.
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
 Push the left-hand side of the lens to switch the
signal will flash five times then automatically turn
light off when the doors are open.
off.
 Push the right-hand side of the lens to switch
2
INTERIOR LIGHTS the light on when the doors are open.
Passenger Vehicle
COURTESY/INTERIOR LIGHTS The interior lamps are located in the center of the
These lights are mounted between the sun visors Map/Dome Lights roof, above the second row seating, and in the roof,
on the overhead console. Each light is turned on by in the center of the rear load area.
1 — OFF
pushing the corresponding switch. Second Row Seating And Rear Roof Lights
2 — AUTO/Dome
Left Switch Operation
3 — Left Map
 Push the left switch to the left to turn off the In auto-mode, the light comes on automatically
4 — Right Map
auto dome lights. The dome lights will not auto- when you open the rear swing doors, and goes out
matically turn on when a door is opened. when you close them.
 Push the left switch to the right to turn on the
Rear Lights  Push the left-hand side of the lens to switch the
dome lights. Cargo Vehicle light off when the doors are open.
Right Switch Lateral Roof Light  Push the right-hand side of the lens to switch
This is located on the right side of the load the light on when the doors are open.
 Push the right switch to the left to turn on the
left map light. compartment.
 Push the right switch to the right to turn on the Rear Roof Light
right map light. This is located on the rear panel of the load
compartment.
Cargo Compartment Light — If Equipped Intermittent Wiper System

The cargo compartment light comes on Rotate the end of the lever upward to the
automatically when the swing doors are opened first detent. The wipers will operate at
and turns off when the doors are closed. intermittent speed. When the vehicle's
speed increases, the time between the
WIPERS AND WASHERS wipes will decrease.
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on Windshield Washers
the right side of the steering column. Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the
NOTE: steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers
The windshield wipers/washers will only operate Windshield Wiper Lever will activate automatically for three cycles after the
with the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) lever is released.
Windshield Wiper Off
position.
This is the normal position of the wiper CAUTION!
FRONT WIPER O PERATION lever.  Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
There are five different modes of operation for the through an automatic car wash. Damage to
front windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever Low Speed the windshield wipers may result if the wiper
can be moved in several positions to access these control is left in any position other than off.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the
modes. second detent. The wipers will operate at  In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
low speed. switch and allow the wipers to return to the
High Speed park position before turning off the engine. If
the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper
third detent. The wipers will operate at motor may occur when the vehicle is
high speed. restarted.
For information on wiper care and replacement, (Continued)
see Ú page 192.
CAUTION!
 In synchronous mode (at half the speed of the MANUAL C LIMATE C ONTROL
front window wiper) when the front window
 Always remove any buildup of snow that wiper is operating DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS
prevents the windshield wiper blades from  In continuous mode while vehicle is in REVERSE
returning to the off position. If the windshield
With the windshield wipers on, and REVERSE gear
wiper control is turned off and the blades
engaged, rear window wiping will be continuous in 2
cannot return to the off position, damage to
the same way.
the wiper motor may occur.
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Manual High Speed/Mist Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward
activates the rear window washer. Keep the
Push the lever upward from the off position. The windshield wiper lever pushed for more than
wipers will operate at high speed to clear off road quarter of a second to activate the rear window
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. This wiper as well. When the windshield wiper lever is
operation will continue until the lever is released. released, the wipers will return to normal Manual Climate Controls
When the lever is released, the wipers will return to operation.
the off position and automatically shut off. System Maintenance
In Winter, the Climate Control system must be
REAR WIPER OPERATION — CLIMATE CONTROLS turned on at least once a month for about
I F EQUIPPED The Climate Control system allows you to regulate 10 minutes.
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air Have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
Rear Windshield Wiper Operation circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are before the Summer.
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring located on the instrument panel below the radio.
upwards to operate the rear window wiper as
follows:
 In intermittent mode when the front window
wiper is not operating
A/C Button when the Recirculation button is pressed. Rear Defrost Button — If Equipped
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Push and release the Rear Defrost
such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate Control button to turn on the rear window
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
when the A/C system is engaged. The A/ defroster and the heated outside mirrors
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
C can be deselected manually without (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that
disturbing the mode control selection. when the rear window defroster is on. The rear
could create fogging on the inside of the
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the window defroster automatically turns OFF after
windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually
operator to manually activate or deactivate the air 20 minutes.
without disturbing the mode control selection.
conditioning system. When the air conditioning Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may
system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow CAUTION!
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
through the outlets into the cabin. occur. Extended use of this mode is not Failure to follow these cautions can cause
 For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in recommended. damage to the heating elements:
Mix, Floor or Defrost mode, the A/C can be In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may  Use care when washing the inside of the rear
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain lead to excessive window fogging. The window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
active to prevent fogging of the windows. Recirculation feature may be unavailable if on the interior surface of the window. Use a
 If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side conditions exist that could create fogging on the soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower inside of the windshield. parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
speed if needed. be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Front Defrost Setting
 If your air conditioning performance seems  Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
Use Defrost mode with maximum
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C temperature settings for best windshield abrasive window cleaners on the interior
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for and side window defrosting and surface of the window.
an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a defogging. Turn the knob to the Front  Keep all objects a safe distance from the
gentle water spray from the front of the radiator Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield
and through the condenser. window.
and side window demist outlets.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change
the system between recirculation mode
and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate
Temperature Control outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and OPERATING T IPS
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of NOTE:
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
the air forced through the climate system.
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
The temperature increases as you turn from these outlets. suggested control settings for various weather
the temperature control knob clockwise. conditions.
Bi-Level Mode 2
Summer Operation
Air comes from the instrument panel
The temperature decreases as you turn The engine cooling system must be protected with
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
the temperature control knob a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
of air is directed through the defrost and
counterclockwise. corrosion protection and to protect against engine
side window demister outlets.
Blower Control overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
NOTE: MS.90032) is recommended Ú page 231.
There are four blower speeds. Use this Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
control to regulate the amount of air tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets Winter Operation
forced through the system in any mode and warmer air from the floor outlets. To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
you select. The blower speed increases performance, make sure the engine cooling
Floor Mode
as you move the control clockwise from the OFF system is functioning properly and the proper
position. Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used
amount of air is directed through the
Mode Control Ú page 231. Use of the Air Recirculation mode
defrost and side window demister
during Winter months is not recommended
Rotate this control to change the airflow outlets.
because it may cause window fogging.
distribution mode. The airflow
Mix Mode Vacation/Storage
distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist and side window demister outlets. This
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
outlets. The Mode settings are as follows: setting works best in cold or snowy
extended period of time, see Ú page 224.
conditions that require extra heat to the
Panel Mode windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
Air comes from the outlets in the comfort while reducing moisture on the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets windshield.
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
Window Fogging Operating Tips Chart INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS STORAGE
glass in mild, rainy and/or humid weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and Set the mode control to
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the (Panel Mode), Glove Compartment
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, (A/C) on, and blower The glove compartment is located on the
as fogging may occur. Hot Weather And on high. Roll down the passenger side of the instrument panel.
Vehicle Interior Is Very windows for a minute To open the glove compartment, pull the release
Outside Air Intake Hot to flush out the hot air. handle.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of Adjust the controls as
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as needed to achieve NOTE:
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may comfort. The glove compartment handle is equipped with a
reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution lock. To lock the glove compartment, insert the
Turn (A/C) on and mechanical key into the glove compartment
box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter
Warm Weather set the mode control to handle lock cylinder and turn the key to the lock
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
(Panel Mode). position and remove the key. Use the reverse
slush, and snow.
Operate in (Bi-Level sequence to unlock the glove compartment.
Cabin Air Filter Cool Sunny
Mode).
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
Set the mode control to
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
Cool & Humid (Mix Mode) and
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
Conditions turn on (A/C) to
when needed.
keep windows clear.
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If
windshield fogging
Cold Weather
starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix
Mode). Glove Compartment
Dash Storage USB C ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED POWER O UTLETS

The dash storage is located on the right side of the The USB Input is located on the instrument panel Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp)
instrument panel above the glove compartment. below the Climate Controls. This feature allows an power outlets that can be used to power cellular
external USB device to be plugged into the USB phones, small electronics and other low powered
port. electrical accessories. The power outlets are
2
labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to
indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets
labeled with a key symbol are powered when the
ignition is in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position,
while the outlets labeled with a battery symbol are
connected directly to the battery and powered at
all times.
Driver And Front Passenger Power Outlets
Dash Storage The power outlets are located in between the
driver and front passenger seats.
Overhead Console Storage
Media Hub
There is additional shelf storage above the front
sun visors. 1 — AUX Port
2 — USB Port
Driver And Front Passenger Power Outlets
Overhead Console Storage Location

Load Compartment Power Outlet

CAUTION!
The Load Compartment Power Outlet is located on
the left side of the rear cargo compartment.  Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
Depending on trim levels, the power outlet location power from the vehicle's battery, even when
may vary. not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu-
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
 All accessories connected to the battery
Underhood Power Outlet Fuse Locations powered outlets should be removed or turned
1 — #15 Fuse 15A Blue IP Power Outlet 12V (Key) off when the vehicle is not in use. Leaving
devices connected overnight will drain the
2 — #30 Fuse 15A Blue 2nd IP Power Outlet 12V
vehicle’s battery.
(Battery)
3 — #85 Fuse 15A Blue Rear Power Outlet 12V  Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
Load Compartment Power Outlet (Key) coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly. Only
use these intermittently and with greater
CAUTION! caution.
WARNING!
Do not connect devices with power higher than  After the use of high power draw accessories,
180 Watts to the outlet. Using unsuitable To avoid serious injury or death:
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
adapters may damage the outlet.  Only devices designed for use in this type of (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. must be driven a sufficient length of time to
 Do not touch with wet hands. allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's
battery.
 Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
WINDOWS NOTE: AUTOMATIC WINDOW F EATURES

 The key off power delay feature will allow the
Auto-Down Feature
POWER W INDOW CONTROLS — power windows to operate for up to three
minutes after the ignition is turned off. This The driver and passenger door power window
I F EQUIPPED feature is canceled when either front door is switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
The window switches on the driver’s door control opened. window switch down for a short period of time, then 2
all door windows. release, and the window will go down automatically.
 The power window switches remain active for up
to three minutes after the ignition switch has To stop the window from going all the way down
been turned off. Opening either of the vehicle’s during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
front doors will cancel this feature. down on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
WARNING!
Lift the window switch up for a short period of time
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with and release; the window will go up automatically.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil- To stop the window from going all the way up
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or switch briefly.
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the To close the window part way, lift the window
Power Window Switch Panel switch briefly and release it when you want the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
1 — Rear Window Control Buttons (If Equipped) selector. window to stop.
2 — Rear Window Lock Button (If Equipped) If the window runs into any obstacle during
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
3 — Driver And Passenger Window Controls auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go
back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
could operate power windows, other controls,
window switch again to close the window.
The passenger door windows can also be operated or move the vehicle.
by using the single window switch on the WARNING!
passenger door trim panel. If the vehicle is
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
equipped with rear power windows, a single
window is almost closed. To avoid personal injury
opening and closing switch on the rear passenger
be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all
doors for passenger window control is provided.
objects from the window path before closing.
POWER W INDOWS S YSTEM Proceed as follows for initialization:

INITIALIZATION 1. Completely close the driver's door window,
keeping the window switch pushed for at
The power windows may be reset if any of the least five seconds after the (upper) end of
following occurs: travel position.
 On the front doors: 2. Proceed in the same way on the passenger's
 Fuse or battery are disconnected when the window switches.
window is moving
 50 window movements without ever closing
REAR WINDOW L OCKOUT S WITCH —
the window I F E QUIPPED Window Bar Grates
 On the rear doors (in addition to the conditions The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
for the front doors): panel allows you to disable the window controls on WARNING!
 Fuse or battery are disconnected when the the rear passenger doors. To disable the window The metal grates over the sliding door windows
window is moving controls, push and release the window lockout are designed to protect you in the event of an
button (the indicator light on the button will turn accident. Modification or removal of the grates
 The auto-reverse system is activated while
on). To enable the window controls, push and could lead to serious injury or death.
the window is moving and the door is
release the window lockout button again (the
opening
indicator light on the button will turn off).
 50 window movements without ever closing WIND B UFFETING
the window WINDOW B AR G RATES — IF EQUIPPED
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
 One door is opening with the window This vehicle may be equipped with metal grates of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
moving, without ever closing the door over the sliding door windows. This feature is a part in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
 Three doors are opening with the window in of the vehicle’s safety system, and is designed to with the windows down in certain open or partially
motion protect you and your passengers in the event of an open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
accident. can be minimized. If wind buffeting occurs, open
During these maneuvers, the upper stop position is
never reached. the front windows together to minimize the
buffeting.
HOOD
OPENING
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the 2
instrument panel and in front of the driver's
door.
Hood Safety Latch Lever Location Hood Prop Rod

3. Raise the hood and place the hood prop rod in
hood slot to secure the hood in the open
CLOSING
position.
WARNING!
CAUTION! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
Be sure to disengage the rod and secure it in your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
closed position before closing the hood. Damage could open when the vehicle is in motion and
Hood Release Lever may occur. block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, reach into
the opening beneath the center of the hood
and push up the safety latch lever to release it, CAUTION!
before raising the hood.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close.
Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches.
Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
CARGO AREA FEATURES NOTE:

Power washing is not allowed inside the cargo WARNING!
REAR CARGO T IE-DOWNS area.  Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly
To make it easier to secure your load, there are WARNING! placed weight over or behind the rear axle can
hooks fixed to the floor (if equipped). cause the rear of the vehicle to sway.
 To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the rear  Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended top of the seatback. This could impair visibility
for load carrying purposes only, not for or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden
passengers, who should sit in seats and use stop or accident.
seat belts.
 Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for
a child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or
ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED
accident, a hook could pull loose and allow the The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry
child seat to come loose. A child could be weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack.
badly injured. Use only the anchors provided The load must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs (Cargo Version) for child seat tethers. should be uniformly distributed over the luggage
rack crossbars.
The weight and position of cargo and
passengers can change the vehicle’s center of NOTE:
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of If not equipped with crossbars, an authorized
control resulting in personal injury, follow these dealer can order and install Mopar® crossbars
guidelines for loading your vehicle: built specifically for this roof rack system.
 Do not carry loads which exceed the load
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
limits described on the label attached to the crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the
left door or left door center pillar. total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure
the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that
 Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. on the external rack does not exceed the maximum
Put heavier objects as low and as far forward vehicle load capacity.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs (Passenger Version) as possible.
(Continued)
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments,

located at the upper edge of each crossbar, WARNING! CAUTION!
approximately eight turns using the anti-theft Cargo must be securely tied down before driving  Loads should always be secured to crossbars
wrench provided with the Mopar® crossbars. your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off first, with tie down loops used as additional
Then, move the crossbar to the desired position, the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting securing points if needed. Tie loops are
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. in personal injury or property damage. Follow intended as supplementary tie down points 2
Once the crossbar is in the desired position, the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with
re-tighten it with the wrench to lock the crossbar your roof rack. the tie loops. Check the straps and thumb
into position. wheels frequently to be sure that the load
NOTE: remains securely attached.
 To help control wind noise when the crossbars
CAUTION!
 Long loads that extend over the windshield,
are not in use, place the front and rear cross-  To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads
bars approximately 24 inches (61 cm) apart. DO NOT carry any loads on the roof rack with large frontal area should be secured to
Optimal noise reduction can then be achieved without the crossbars deployed. The load both the front and rear of the vehicle.
by adjusting the front crossbar forward or aft should be secured and placed on top of the
 Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
using increments of 1 inch (2.5 cm). crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
 If the crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed necessary to place the load on the roof, place
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), a blanket or other protective layer between
causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden
you may experience interruption of satellite the load and the roof surface.
upward lift to a load. This is especially true on
radio reception. For improved satellite radio  To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, large flat loads and may result in damage to
reception, avoid placing the rear crossbar over do not exceed the maximum roof rack load the cargo or your vehicle.
the satellite radio antenna. capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute
heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure
the load appropriately.
(Continued)
40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 41
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ESCRIPTIONS CAUTION! LOCATION AND CONTROLS

1. Speedometer Driving with a hot engine cooling system could The instrument cluster display features a driver
 Indicates vehicle speed. damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge interactive display that is located in the instrument
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the cluster.
2. Fuel Gauge vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
 The pointer shows the level of fuel in the the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine
ON/RUN position. off immediately and call an authorized dealer for 3
 The fuel pump arrow symbol points service.
to the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located. 4. Tachometer
3. Temperature Gauge  Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
 The temperature gauge shows engine
per minute (RPM x 1000).
coolant temperature. Any reading within the 5. Instrument Cluster Display
normal range indicates that the engine  When the appropriate conditions exist, this Instrument Cluster Display Location
cooling system is operating satisfactorily. display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 41. The menu items described below are an example
 The pointer will likely indicate a higher
of what can be found in the vehicle's menu:
temperature when driving in hot weather or
up mountain grades. It should not be INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY  Dimmer
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the  Speed Beep
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument
normal operating range.
cluster display, which offers useful information to  Trip A / B (options are selectable through the
the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode, steering wheel stalk)
WARNING!
opening/closing of a door will activate the display  Buzzer Volume
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or for viewing, and display the total miles, or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling kilometers, in the odometer. The steering wheel
coolant. You may want to call an authorized mounted controls allow you to scroll through the
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats main menus and submenus. You can access the
Ú page 195. specific information you want and make selections
and adjustments.
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information Dimmer: CHANGE ENGINE OIL — IF EQUIPPED
by pushing the following buttons mounted on the With headlights on and without entering in the
instrument panel to the right of the steering column: Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil
menu, push the up or down arrow button to change indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil”
increase or decrease the brightness of the message will display in the instrument cluster
instrument panel, graphics and command buttons. display. The engine oil change indicator system is
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
Submenu: change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to your personal driving style.
display the first submenu option. Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/
2. Push and release the up or down arrow RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily,
button (by single pushes) to scroll through all push and release the MENU button. To reset the oil
the submenu options. change indicator system (after performing the
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to scheduled maintenance), refer to the following
select the displayed submenu option and to procedure.
 MENU Button open the relevant setup menu. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do
Push and release the MENU button for a time not start the engine).
4. Push and release the up or down arrow
longer than one second to access/select the
button (by single pushes) to select the new 2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three
information screens or submenu screens of a
setting for this submenu option. times, within 10 seconds.
main menu item. Push and hold the MENU
button for two seconds to reset displayed/ 5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
selected features that can be reset. store the new setting and go back to the
 Up And Down Arrow Buttons: previously selected submenu option. NOTE:
6. Push and hold the MENU button to return to If the indicator message illuminates when you start
Using the up or down arrow button allows the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
you to cycle through the Main Menu Items. the main menu (short hold) or the main screen
(longer hold). reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
NOTE:
If equipped with a Uconnect system, some of the
menu items will be present in the radio head unit
Ú page 78.
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ISPLAY MENU Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu Buzzer Volume
screen or hold the MENU button down to return to
I TEMS the standard screen without storing.
With this function, the volume of the acoustic
signal which accompanies the display of failure/
Speed Beep To cancel the setting: warning can be adjusted according to seven levels.
This function is used to set a speed limit (MPH or 1. Briefly push the MENU button, “ON” will flash To set the desired volume:
km/h); the driver is alerted when this limit is in the display.
1. Push the MENU button, the previously set
exceeded.
2. Push the down arrow button, “OFF” will volume level will flash on the display.
To set the desired speed limit: flash in the display. 3
2. Push and release the up or down arrow
1. Push the MENU button briefly. The display will 3. Push the MENU button briefly to return to the button to adjust.
show the wording (SPEED BEEP) and the unit menu screen or hold the MENU button down to
(MPH) or (km/h) previously set. 3. Push the MENU button to return to the menu
return to the standard screen without storing.
screen or hold the MENU button down to
2. If the function is on, push and release the return to the standard screen without storing.
up or down arrow button to select the Trip B Data
required speed limit and then push MENU to This function can be used to activate (On) or Seat Belt Buzzer
confirm. deactivate (Off) the Trip B display (Partial Trip) Only shows in the instrument cluster display if the
Ú page 44. seat belt reminder was previously deactivated by
NOTE: To switch the function On/Off: an authorized dealer.
The speed may be set in the range from 20 to
125 mph (30 to 200 km/h) according to the previ- 1. Push the MENU button briefly. The display will NOTE:
ously chosen unit. flash On or Off according to the previous This is a one-time occurrence to enable the
setting. acoustic signal.
The setting will increase/decrease by five units
each time the up or down arrow button is 2. Push and release the up or down arrow
pushed. Hold down the up or down arrow button to select.
button to automatically increase/decrease the Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
setting rapidly. Complete the adjustment when you screen or hold the MENU button down to return to
approach the desired value. the standard screen without storing.
Exit Menu TRIP BUTTON New Trip

This is the last function that closes the cycle of To reset:
The TRIP button, located on the right steering
settings listed in the menu screen. column stalk, can be used to display and to reset  Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the
1. Pushing the MENU button briefly will return the previously described values. system manually.
the display to the standard screen without  When the “Trip distance” reaches
storing. 99999.9 miles or kilometers or when the
2. Push the down arrow button to return to the “Travel time” reaches 999.59 (999 hours and
first menu item on the display. 59 minutes), the system is reset automatically.
 Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets
TRIP COMPUTER the system.
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument NOTE:

cluster. It features a driver interactive display If the reset operation occurs in the presence of the
(displays information such as trip information, screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infor-
range, fuel consumption, average speed, and mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions
travel time). Trip Button Location will be reset.
Start Of Trip Procedure
NOTE:  A short button push displays the different
The Uconnect System also has a Trip Computer values. With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button
display and menus to customize the information for over two seconds to reset trip information.
 A long button push resets the system and then
displayed in the cluster Ú page 78. Exit Trip
starts a new trip.
1. To exit the Trip function, wait until all the
values have been displayed or hold the MENU
button for longer than one second.
2. Briefly push and release the MENU button to
go back to the menu screen or push and hold
the MENU button (approximately one second)
to go back to the main screen without storing
settings.
TRIP FUNCTIONS VALUES D ISPLAYED Current Fuel Consumption

This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of Range
new trip). constantly updated. The message “----” will appear
This indicates the distance which may be traveled on the display if the vehicle is parked with the
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating with the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that engine running.
to: driving conditions will not change. The message
“----” will appear on the display in the following Average Speed
 Range
cases: This value shows the vehicle's average speed as a
 Trip distance A
function of the overall time elapsed since the last 3
 Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
 Average Economy A reset.
 The vehicle is parked for a long time with the
 Instantaneous Economy Travel Time
engine running.
 Average speed A This value shows the time elapsed since the last
NOTE:
 Travel time A (driving time) The range depends on several factors: driving reset.
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain
to: roads, etc.), conditions of use of the vehicle (load, WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
tire pressure, etc.). Trip planning must take into The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
 Trip distance B
account the above notes. instrument panel together with a dedicated
 Average Economy B
Travel Distance message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
 Average speed B These indications are indicative and precautionary
This value shows the distance covered since the
 Travel time B (driving time) last reset. and as such must not be considered as exhaustive
NOTE: and/or alternative to the information contained in
Average Fuel Consumption the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
“Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B
This value shows the approximate average carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
Data”). Range and Instantaneous Economy cannot
consumption since the last reset. information in this chapter in the event of a failure
be reset.
indication. All active telltales will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may appear
different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional
and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
case, the light will remain on until the condition has (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Air Bag Warning Light been corrected. If the problem is related to the Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
This light will turn on for four to eight brake booster, the ABS pump will run when failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
seconds as a bulb check when the applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or MAR/ may be felt during each stop. system is required.
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not The dual brake system provides a reserve braking Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
on during startup, stays on, or turns on while capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
driving, have the system inspected by an hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level should then turn off unless the parking brake is
the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will in the master cylinder has dropped below a applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes specified level. not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
on intermittently or remains on while driving, have The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. authorized dealer.
an authorized dealer service the vehicle The light also will turn on when the parking brake
immediately. NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
Brake Warning Light cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level position.
This warning light monitors various brake conditions. The vehicle should have service NOTE:
functions, including brake fluid level and performed, and the brake fluid level checked. This light shows only that the parking brake is
parking brake application. If the brake If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
light turns on it may indicate that the necessary. cation.
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level Battery Charge Warning Light
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock WARNING!
Brake System reservoir. This warning light will illuminate when the
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is battery is not charging properly. If it stays
If the light remains on when the parking brake has dangerous. Part of the brake system may have on while the engine is running, there may
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You be a malfunction with the charging
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or immediately. possible. This indicates a possible problem with
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been the electrical system or a related component.
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
Door Open Warning Light Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Transmission Temperature Warning
This indicator will illuminate when one or Light Light — If Equipped
more door(s) are not fully closed. This warning light warns of an This warning light will illuminate to warn
overheated engine condition. If the of a high transmission fluid temperature.
NOTE: engine coolant temperature is too high, This may occur with strenuous usage
If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there this indicator will illuminate and a single such as trailer towing. If this light turns
will also be a single chime. chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or 3
minutes or until the engine is able to cool, NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light
Light whichever comes first. turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
This warning light will illuminate to inform If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
of a problem with the ETC system. If a and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) WARNING!
problem is detected while the vehicle is system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission If you continue operating the vehicle when the
running, the light will either stay on or into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle temperature reading does not return to normal, illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
the ignition when the vehicle is safely and turn the engine off immediately and call for service come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
completely stopped and the transmission is placed Ú page 179. components and cause a fire.
in the PARK (P) position. The light should turn off. If
the light remains on with the vehicle running, your Oil Pressure Warning Light
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an This warning light will illuminate to CAUTION!
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the Continuous driving with the Transmission
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
running, immediate service is required and you
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A eventually cause severe transmission damage
may experience reduced performance, an
chime will sound when this light turns on. or transmission failure.
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or MAR/ corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
check. If the light does not come on during starting, checked under the hood.
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS Generic Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the The Generic Warning Light will illuminate
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, if the if any of the following conditions occur:
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime Light Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure,
will sound and the light will turn on. When This light monitors the ABS. The light will External Light Failure, Parking Sensor
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt turn on when the ignition is placed in the Failure, Fuel Cut-Off Fail/Intervention, Generic
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position and Failure on Trailer, or Air Bag telltale recovery.
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime may stay on for as long as four seconds. The telltale will blink in case of an Air Bag Warning
will sound Ú page 135. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while Light Failure. Contact an authorized dealer
Transmission Fault Warning Light driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake immediately for service.
system is not functioning and service is required.
This light will illuminate (together with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
However, the conventional brake system will
message in the instrument cluster Warning Light
continue to operate normally if the brake warning
display and a buzzer) to indicate a
light is not on. The warning light switches on and a
transmission fault. Contact an authorized
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be message is displayed to indicate that the
dealer if the message remains after restarting the
serviced as soon as possible to restore the tire pressure is lower than the
engine.
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does recommended value and/or that slow
Engine Oil Level Warning Light not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/ pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
This warning light appears on the panel RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, have the light tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
when the engine oil level falls below the inspected by an authorized dealer. guaranteed.
minimum recommended value. Restore Should one or more tires be in the condition
the correct engine oil level or contact an Low Fuel Warning Light
mentioned above, the display will show the
authorized dealer for service. When the fuel level reaches indications corresponding to each tire.
approximately 2–3 gal (9–11 L) this light
will turn on, and remain on until fuel is
added.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

CAUTION! proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, The TPMS has been optimized for the original
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the even if underinflation has not reached the level to equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure and warning have been established for the tire
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using telltale. size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS system operation or sensor damage may result
authorized dealer as soon as possible. malfunction indicator to indicate when the system when using replacement equipment that is not
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket 3
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
and then remain continuously illuminated. This become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle tire sealant it is recommended that you take
inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
a different size than the size indicated on the
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sensor function checked.
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
for those tires. pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may Vehicle Security Warning Light
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been This warning light will illuminate when the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire vehicle security system has detected an
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is attempt to break into the vehicle.
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the Warning Light (MIL)
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation Diagnostic System called OBD II that
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and monitors engine and automatic
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping transmission control systems. This warning light
ability. will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position before engine start. After placing the in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
ignition to the ON/RUN position, if there is a WARNING! several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
problem with the Sentry Key System, the Vehicle A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as refer- driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
Security Light will turn on. This condition will result enced above, can reach higher temperatures than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
in the engine being shut off after two seconds. If than in normal operating conditions. This can as soon as possible to have the problem
the bulb does not come on when turning the cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flam- diagnosed and corrected.
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the mable substances such as dry plants, wood,  The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
condition checked promptly. cardboard, etc. This could result in death or seri- cator Light come on momentarily each time the
NOTE: ous injury to the driver, occupants or others. ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/
This warning light will illuminate when the vehicle RUN position.
security system has detected an attempt to break  Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
into the vehicle. CAUTION!
MAR/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator if it was turned off previously.
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehi-  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if cle control system. It also could affect fuel econ- sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
the light stays on through several typical driving omy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive severe catalytic converter damage and power
normally and will not require towing. loss will soon occur. Immediate service is  This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
required. ESC event.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning Warning Light — If Equipped
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Light — If Equipped
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this
occurs. The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument Each time the ignition is turned to ON/
cluster will come on when the ignition is RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system
placed in the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN will be on, even if it was turned off previously.
position, and when ESC is activated. It
should go out with the engine running. If the ESC
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected
GREEN INDICATOR L IGHTS Cruise Control Indicator Light — ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
If Equipped
Turn Signal Indicator Lights Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
This indicator light will illuminate when Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
When the left or right turn signal is the cruise control is activated
activated, the turn signal indicator will system monitors the performance of the
Ú page 61. emissions, engine, and transmission control
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps NOTE: systems. When these systems are operating
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the There will be no change in the indicator light when properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up the desired speed is set. performance and fuel economy, as well as engine 3
(right). emissions well within current government
BLUE INDICATOR L IGHTS regulations.
NOTE:
 A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
High Beam Indicator Light If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either This indicator light will illuminate to
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
turn signal on. indicate that the high beam headlights
information to assist your service technician in
are on. With the low beams activated,
 Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
push the multifunction lever forward
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light dealer for service as soon as possible.
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
This indicator light will illuminate when (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
CAUTION!
the parking lights or headlights are beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
turned on Ú page 25. toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to  Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
pass” scenario. further damage to the emission control
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped system. It could also affect fuel economy and
This indicator light will illuminate when driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
the front fog lights are on Ú page 25. before any emissions tests can be performed.
 If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC S YSTEM EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the MIL symbol come
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS on as part of a normal bulb check.
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
connection port to allow access to information things will happen:
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
related to the performance of your emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent
controls. Authorized service technicians may need  The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
vehicle registration.
to access this information to assist with the then return to being fully illuminated until you
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and For states that require an Inspection and turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
emissions system Ú page 77. Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
WARNING! functioning and is not on when the station.
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
 ONLY an authorized service technician should  The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
ready for testing.
connect equipment to the OBD II connection illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or The OBD ll may not be ready if your vehicle was position or start the engine. This means that
service your vehicle. recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you
or a battery replacement. If the OBD ll system can proceed to the I/M station.
 If unauthorized equipment is connected to the should be determined not ready for the I/M test,
OBD II connection port, such as a your vehicle may fail the test. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
driver-behavior tracking device, it may: an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
 Be possible that vehicle systems, which you can use prior to going to the test station. failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
including safety related systems, could be To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could you must do the following: in order for your OBD II system to update. A
occur that may result in an accident 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, recheck with the above test routine may then
involving serious injury or death. but do not crank or start the engine. indicate that the system is now ready.
 Access, or allow others to access, infor- NOTE:
mation stored in your vehicle systems, If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
including personal information. start this test over.
53
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE NOTE:
You must press the brake pedal before shifting out
EXTENDED P ARK S TARTING
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, of PARK. NOTE:
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
your seat belts. NORMAL STARTING has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV (START) position 1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to
WARNING! and release it when the engine starts. If the engine the battery to ensure a full battery charge
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition during the crank cycle. 4
access to an unlocked vehicle. switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 2. Place the ignition in the AVV (START) position
15 seconds, then repeat this procedure. and release it when the engine starts.
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child COLD WEATHER OPERATION 3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds,
or others could be seriously or fatally injured. place the ignition in the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
Children should be warned not to touch the To ensure reliable starting at low temperatures, position, wait five seconds to allow the starter
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis- use of an externally powered electric engine block to cool, then repeat the Extended Park Starting
sion gear selector. heater (available from an authorized dealer) is procedure.
recommended.
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle 4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts,
To prevent possible engine damage while starting allow the starter to cool for at least
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
at low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine 10 minutes, then repeat the procedure.
could operate power windows, other controls,
cranking when the ambient temperature is less
or move the vehicle.
than -31°F (-35° C) and the oil temperature
sensor reading indicates an engine block heater CAUTION!
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION has not been used. The message “plug in engine To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster continuously for more than 10 seconds at a
The gear selector must be in the PARK (P) or when the ambient temperature is below -25°F time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
NEUTRAL (N) position before you can start the (-32° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a
engine. Press the brake pedal before shifting to reminder.
any driving gear.
54 STARTING AND OPERATING
I F ENGINE F AILS T O S TART CAUTION!

3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and
plug it into a grounded, three-wire extension
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the To prevent damage to the starter, do not continu- cord.
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” ously crank the engine for more than 25 sec- 4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord
procedure, and has not experienced an extended onds at a time. Wait 60 seconds before trying to the hook-and-loop strap and properly stow
park condition as identified in “Extended Park again. away behind the driver’s side headlamp.
Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it NOTE:
there. Crank the engine for no more than AFTER S TARTING
15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in  The engine block heater cord is a factory
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped,
case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in
will decrease as the engine warms up. heater cords are available from an authorized
the MAR (ON/RUN) position, release the accelerator
pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. dealer.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED  The engine block heater will require 110 Volts
WARNING! The engine block heater warms the engine and AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater
permits quicker starts in cold weather. element.
 Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical  The engine block heater must be plugged in at
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. least one hour to have an adequate warming
in flash fire causing serious personal injury. effect on the engine.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the
 Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to engine block heater is recommended. For ambient WARNING!
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto- temperatures below -20°F (-29°C), the engine
matic transmission cannot be started this block heater is required. Remember to disconnect the engine block
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic The engine block heater cord is routed under the heater cord before driving. Damage to the
converter and once the engine has started, hood, behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. the steps below to properly use the engine block electrocution.
 If the vehicle has a discharged battery, heater:

booster cables may be used to obtain a start 1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind
from a booster battery or the battery in the driver’s side headlamp).
another vehicle. This type of start can be 2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures the
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 177. heater cord in place.
STARTING AND OPERATING 55
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS your oil level with the engine oil indicator often
during the break-in period. Add oil as required.
NOTE:
 When the parking brake is applied and the auto-
A long break-in period is not required for the engine matic transmission is placed in gear, the Brake
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
vehicle.
PARKING BRAKE Warning Light will flash. If vehicle speed is
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles Fully release the parking brake before
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), attempting to move the vehicle.
leave an automatic transmission in PARK.
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are  This light only shows that the parking brake is
desirable. The parking brake lever is located in the center
console. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever applied. It does not show the degree of brake
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within application.
up as firmly as possible. To release the parking
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
4
brake, pull the lever up slightly, push the center
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
button, then lower the lever completely.
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. and away from the curb on an uphill grade. For
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. apply the parking brake before placing the gear
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the
climate conditions under which vehicle operations transmission locking mechanism may make it
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
quality grades Ú page 231. parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
WARNING!
Oil in the engine or damage may result.  When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
Parking Brake key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
NOTE: When the parking brake is applied with the ignition  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
A new engine may consume some oil during its first switch in the ON position, the Brake Warning Light access to an unlocked vehicle.
few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This in the instrument cluster display will illuminate. (Continued)
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as a concern. Please check
WARNING! AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING!

 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended You must press and hold the brake pedal while  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child shifting out of PARK. access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
or others could be seriously or fatally injured. dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
Children should be warned not to touch the WARNING! dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
selector. NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than Children should be warned not to touch the
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate sion gear selector.
could operate power windows, other controls, quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose  Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
or move the vehicle. control of the vehicle and hit someone or vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
something. Only shift into gear when the dren). A child could operate power windows,
 Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly other controls, or move the vehicle.
before driving; failure to do so can lead to pressing the brake pedal.
brake failure and a collision.
 Unintended movement of a vehicle could
 Always fully apply the parking brake when injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all CAUTION!
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while  Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave an the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
automatic transmission in PARK. Failure to do always come to a complete stop, then apply
so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause the parking brake, shift the transmission into  Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
damage or injury. PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
ignition key. Once the key is removed, the idle speed.
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the  Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
CAUTION! vehicle against unwanted movement. foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on  When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
with the parking brake released, a brake system ignition key from the vehicle and lock the
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system vehicle.
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
(Continued)
KEY I GNITION P ARK I NTERLOCK of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped can be made using the ERS shift control. Moving
or moving at low speeds). Select the DRIVE range the gear selector into the ERS (-/+) position (beside
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park for normal driving. the DRIVE position) activates ERS mode, displays
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in the current gear in the instrument cluster, and
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the full
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear prevents automatic upshifts beyond this gear. In
STOP (OFF/LOCK) (key removal) position. The key ERS mode, toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
can only be removed from the ignition when the selector position and the actual transmission gear
(for example, driver selects REVERSE while driving rearward (+) will change the highest available gear
ignition is in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, and Ú page 60.
once removed, the transmission is locked in PARK. forward), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper NOTE:
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT position, or the requested shift can be completed. If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
I NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM The electronically-controlled transmission adapts REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed 4
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along forward) it is probably in the ERS (+/-) position
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the with environmental and road conditions. The (beside the DRIVE position). In ERS mode, the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the transmission electronics are self-calibrating; transmission gear limit (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to
PARK, the ignition must be in the MAR (ON/RUN) be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to
mode (engine running or not) and the brake pedal and precision shifts will develop within a few PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
must be pressed. hundred miles or kilometers.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from Software and calibration is refined to optimize the
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle customer’s driving experience and fuel economy.
is stopped or moving at low speeds. By design, some vehicle and driveline
combinations utilize NINTH gear only in very
9-SPEED A UTOMATIC T RANSMISSION specific driving situations and conditions.
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
both beside the gear selector and in the the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
instrument cluster display. To select a gear range, stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
push the lock button on the gear selector and pedal when shifting between these gears.
move the lever rearward or forward. You must also
press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out The transmission gear selector provides PARK, Gear Selector
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift positions. Manual downshifts
Gear Ranges
WARNING! WARNING!
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
out of PARK or NEUTRAL.  Never use the PARK position as a substitute  Unintended movement of a vehicle could
for the parking brake. Always apply the injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
NOTE: parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to guard against vehicle movement and possible the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler- injury or damage. always come to a complete stop, then apply
ating. This is especially important when the engine the parking brake, shift the transmission into
is cold.  Your vehicle could move and injure you and
PARK, turn the engine off, and remove the
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
PARK (P) move the gear selector out of PARK with the
ignition key. Once the key is removed, the
The engine can be started in this range. Never transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. vehicle against unwanted movement.
mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
If necessary, apply the parking brake prior to  When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
placing the vehicle in PARK.  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than ignition key from the vehicle and lock the
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing vehicle.
before shifting the transmission to PARK, the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
otherwise the load on the transmission locking quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear control of the vehicle and hit someone or dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn something. Only shift into gear when the dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly others could be seriously or fatally injured.
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. pressing the brake pedal. Children should be warned not to touch the
When exiting the vehicle, always: (Continued) parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
 Apply the parking brake. sion gear selector.
 Shift the transmission into PARK.  Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
 Turn the engine off.
dren). A child could operate power windows,
 Remove the ignition key. other controls, or move the vehicle.
NEUTRAL (N) When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such

CAUTION! as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
 Before moving the transmission gear selector conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply
out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use
the parking brake and shift the transmission into
ON/RUN mode, and also press the brake the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to
PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector select a lower gear range Ú page 60. Under these
could result. WARNING! conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
 DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
this can damage the drivetrain. If the transmission temperature exceeds normal
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
operating limits, the transmission controller may 4
modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce
The following indicators should be used to ensure of the vehicle and have a collision.
engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque
that you have properly engaged the transmission converter clutch engagement. This is done to
into the PARK position: prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
 When shifting into PARK, push the lock button
CAUTION!
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
on the gear selector and firmly move the gear Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any “Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may
selector all the way forward until it stops and is other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL illuminate and the transmission may operate
fully seated. can cause severe transmission damage. differently until the transmission cools down.
 Look at the transmission gear position display For Recreational Towing Ú page 74. During cold temperatures, transmission operation
and verify that it indicates the PARK position. may be modified depending on engine and
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 182.
 With brake pedal released, verify that the gear transmission temperature as well as vehicle
selector will not move out of PARK. speed. This feature improves warm up time of the
DRIVE (D) engine and transmission to achieve maximum
REVERSE (R)
This range should be used for most city and efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. clutch, and shifts into EIGHTH or NINTH gear, are
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
to a complete stop. Ú page 60. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission automatically upshifts through all
forward gears. transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode condition of your transmission. If the transmission You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at
cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the
Transmission function is monitored electronically
required. DRIVE position, the transmission will operate
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
Torque Converter Clutch automatically, shifting between all available gears.
that could result in transmission damage,
Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this A feature designed to improve fuel economy has Moving the gear selector to the ERS position
mode, the transmission may operate only in a fixed been included in the automatic transmission on (beside DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, display the
gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL. The Malfunction your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that
Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode,
Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to may result in a slightly different feeling or response moving the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+)
an authorized dealer for service without damaging during normal operation in the upper gears. When will change the top available gear, which will be
the transmission. the vehicle speed drops or during some displayed in the instrument cluster.
In the event of a momentary problem, the accelerations, the clutch automatically To exit ERS mode, simply return the gear selector
transmission can be reset to regain all forward disengages. to the DRIVE position.
gears by performing the following steps: NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until
WARNING!
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK. the transmission fluid is warm [usually after 1 to Do not downshift for additional engine braking
3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because the engine on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
3. Turn the ignition OFF. speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is causing a collision or personal injury.
5. Restart the engine. not shifting properly when cold. This is normal. The
torque converter clutch will function normally once
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the NOTE:
the transmission is sufficiently warm.
problem is no longer detected, the To select the proper gear position for maximum
transmission will return to normal operation. Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation deceleration (engine braking), move the gear
The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the selector into the ERS position, then simply press
NOTE: highest available gear. For example, if you set the and hold it forward (-). The transmission will shift to
Even if the transmission can be reset, we transmission gear limit to FIFTH gear, the the range from which the vehicle can best be
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at transmission will not shift above FIFTH gear, but slowed down.
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized will shift through the lower gears normally.
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
POWER STEERING CAUTION!

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper
indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled
The standard power steering system provides Prolonged operation of the steering system at fluid from all surfaces Ú page 232.
increased vehicle response and ease of the end of the steering wheel travel will increase
maneuverability. The system will provide
mechanical steering capability if power assist is
the steering fluid temperature and it should be CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
avoided when possible. Damage to the power
lost. When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
steering pump may occur.
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted,
25 mph (40 km/h).
it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under
these conditions, you will observe a substantial
POWER S TEERING FLUID C HECK The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
increase in steering effort, especially at very low Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined 4
vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers. service interval is not required. The fluid should
NOTE: only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal
noises are apparent, and/or the system is not
 Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection
wheel travel are considered normal and do not
efforts through an authorized dealer.
indicate that there is a problem with the power
steering system.
WARNING!
 Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power
steering pump may make noise for a short Fluid level should be checked on a level surface
amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick and with the engine off to prevent injury from
fluid in the steering system. This noise should moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level
be considered normal, and it does not in any reading. Do not overfill. Use only the manufac- Cruise Control Buttons
way damage the steering system. turer recommended power steering fluid.
1 — On/Off
2 — CAN/Cancel
CAUTION! 3 — RES (+)/Resume/Accel
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steer- 4 — SET (–)/Set Speed/Decel
ing system as the chemicals can damage your
power steering components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
TO ACTIVATE TO VARY THE SPEED S ETTING TO ACCELERATE F OR P ASSING

Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed Press the accelerator as you would normally. When
Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system speed by pushing the RES (+) button, or decrease set speed.
off, push the on/off button a second time. The the speed by pushing the SET (-) button. Using Cruise Control On Hills
cruise indicator light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use. U.S. Speed (mph) The transmission may downshift on hills to
 Pushing the RES (+) or SET (-) button once will maintain the vehicle set speed.
WARNING! result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each NOTE:
subsequent tap of the button results in an The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not
adjustment of 1 mph. down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you  If the button is continually pushed, the set is normal.
want. You could lose control and have an speed will continue to adjust until the button is On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
accident. Always leave the system off when you released, then the new set speed will be estab- occur so it may be preferable to drive without
are not using it. lished. Cruise Control.
Metric Speed (km/h)
WARNING!
TO SET A D ESIRED SPEED  Pushing the RES (+) or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has subsequent tap of the button results in an system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
reached the desired speed greater than 25 mph adjustment of 1 km/h. vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
(40 km/h), push the SET (-) button and release. you could lose control and have an accident. Do
 If the button is continually pushed, the set
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
operate at the selected speed. speed will continue to adjust until the button is
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
released, then the new set speed will be estab-
NOTE: slippery.
lished.
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-)
button.
TO RESUME S PEED Interaction With Trailer Towing

The ParkSense system is automatically
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
deactivated when a trailer equipped by Mopar® is
button and release. Resume can be used at any
hitched to the vehicle. The system will be
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h) up to the
automatically activated as soon as the trailer is
maximum speed of 100 mph (160 km/h).
removed. If it does not happen, turning the key
TO DEACTIVATE ignition switch to OFF and then to ON again would
be needed. If a non-Mopar® trailer hitch is
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CAN button, mounted, the sensor deactivation cannot be
or normal brake pressure will deactivate the Cruise guaranteed.
Control system without erasing the set speed from ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors Locations 4
memory. PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition SENSORS If several obstacles are detected, the ParkSense
switch off erases the set speed from memory. system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear The minimum height of a detectable obstacle
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
corresponds to the maximum height of an obstacle
that would clear the underside of the vehicle
IF EQUIPPED sensors can detect obstacles, in the horizontal
direction, from approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
during the parking maneuver.
The ParkSense system provides an audible up to 55 inches (140 cm) from the center of the
indication of the distance between the rear fascia/ rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 inches (60 cm)
bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up from the corners of the rear fascia/bumper,
(e.g. during a parking maneuver) Ú page 65. depending on the location, type and orientation of
The ParkSense system is automatically activated the obstacle.
when the transmission is placed into REVERSE. As
the distance from an obstacle behind the vehicle
decreases, the audible alert becomes more
frequent.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST ALERTS

If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear is engaged, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses between the tones are directly proportional to
the distance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle
is less than 12 inches (30 cm) away.
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Park Assist System

SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
 Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as
the distance decreases
An obstacle is present within the sensors' field of
Obstacle Distance  Emits continuous tone at 12 inches (30 cm)
view
 Adjustable volume level programmable through
personal settings in the instrument cluster
display Ú page 41
Visual Signal (instrument panel)
 Icon appears on display
Failure Sensor or system failures
 Message is displayed on instrument cluster
display (if equipped)
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is muted.

The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant.
If this condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is turned off after three seconds (stopping warnings during maneuvers parallel to walls).
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST WARNING!

FAILURE I NDICATIONS SYSTEM U SAGE PRECAUTIONS  Drivers must be careful when backing up even
A malfunction of the ParkSense sensors or system NOTE: when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by  Ensure that the outer surface and the underside behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
the instrument panel warning icon. of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
The warning icon is illuminated and a snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction to keep vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
message is displayed on the instrument the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system oper- backing up. You are responsible for safety and
cluster display (if equipped) Ú page 45. ating properly. must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously  Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
when the ignition is in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) tions could affect the performance of the Park-
serious injury or death. 4
position. Failures are indicated immediately if they Sense system.  Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
occur when the system is on. mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
 Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
assembly is disconnected from the vehicle
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific care not to scratch or damage them. The
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
sensor is in failure condition, the instrument sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
cluster display shall indicate that the ParkSense slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
system is unavailable, without reference to the result in the system not working properly. The
will be much closer to the obstacle than the
sensor in failure condition. If even a single sensor ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the
fails, the entire system will be disabled. The system behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
is turned off automatically. false indication that an obstacle is behind the
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
fascia/bumper.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK depending on its size and shape, giving a false
 Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not indication that an obstacle is behind the
ASSIST SYSTEM be placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the vehicle.
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash rear fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle.
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard Failure to do so can result in the system misin-
cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors quickly terpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
while keeping the vapor jet/high pressure washing causing a failure indication to be displayed in
nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm) from the sensors. the instrument cluster display.
Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you
could damage the sensors.
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the the vehicle. The following table shows the
CAUTION! screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. approximate distances for each zone:
 ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear license plate. Distance To The Rear Of
unable to recognize every obstacle, including Zone
The Vehicle
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be The Rear Back Up Camera can also be activated
temporarily detected or not detected at all. when the vehicle is not in REVERSE through the Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Obstacles located above or below the sensors Uconnect system Ú page 78. Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
NOTE: 3 ft or greater
Green
If one of the rear cargo doors is not completely (1 m or greater)
 The vehicle must be driven slowly when using closed, the Back Up Camera cannot provide an
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time accurate image of the area behind the vehicle. A
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom- dedicated message will appear on the Uconnect WARNING!
mended that the driver looks over his/her display indicating the camera is not in the correct
shoulder when using ParkSense. Drivers must be careful when backing up even
position.
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
The Camera Delay setting can be set to on/off in Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch the rear camera settings menu. When the vehicle be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
ball assembly mounted for a long period, it is is shifted out of REVERSE and the Camera Delay is vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
possible to filter out the ball mount and hitch ball turned off, the rear camera mode is exited and the backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
assembly presence in the sensor field of view. The navigation or audio screen appears on display your surroundings and must continue to pay
filtering operation must be performed only by an again. attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
authorized dealer. When the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE, result in serious injury or death.
and Camera Delay is activated in the menu screen,
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA the camera image will continue to be displayed for
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
up to 10 seconds, unless the speed of the vehicle CAUTION!
is greater than 8 mph (13 km/h), the gear selector
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an  To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
is in PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
position.
vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into camera is unable to view every obstacle or
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the object in your drive path.
touchscreen display along with a caution note to width of the vehicle and will show separate zones
(Continued)
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of
CAUTION! WARNING!
 To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be  Never have any smoking materials lit in or
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is or the tank is being filled.
recommended that the driver look frequently
 Never add fuel when the engine is running.
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
NOTE: tion Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
Fuel Filler Cap  A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a 4
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
NOTE: You could be burned. Always place gas
lens.
The driver's side sliding door cannot be opened containers on the ground while filling.
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates
REFUELING THE VEHICLE only when the sliding door is in a closed position
The gas cap is located on the left side of the prior to opening the fuel door. CAUTION!
vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure 3. Fully insert the gasoline nozzle into the filler  Damage to the fuel system or emissions
to use the correct replacement cap for this vehicle. pipe. control system could result from using an
1. Open the fuel filler door. 4. Fill the vehicle with fuel. improper fuel tank filler tube cap. A poorly
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counter- NOTE: fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel
clockwise. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel system and may cause the Malfunction Indi-
tank is full. cator Light (MIL) to turn on, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
5. Remove gasoline nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and
close fuel filler door.  To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE:  Type of vehicle TIRE SIZE

 Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a  Month, Day, and Hour (MDH) of manufacture
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
“clicking” sound. This is an indication that the The bar code allows a computer scanner to read represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
fuel filler cap is properly tightened. the VIN. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
 If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL capacity of this tire size.
may come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened GROSS V EHICLE WEIGHT RATING
every time the vehicle is refueled. (GVWR) RIM S IZE
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
VEHICLE LOADING The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and size listed.
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a not exceed the GVWR.
I NFLATION P RESSURE
certification label affixed to the driver's side door or This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
B-pillar. GROSS A XLE W EIGHT RATING (GAWR) vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
CURB W EIGHT
exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL exceed either front or rear GAWR. weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no
affixed to the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear of the WARNING! occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
driver’s door. front and rear curb weight values are determined
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
The label contains the following information: important that you do not exceed the maximum
before any occupants or cargo are added.
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving
 Name of manufacturer
condition can result if either rating is exceeded. OVERLOADING
 Month and year of manufacture You could lose control of the vehicle and have a
 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) collision. The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide
 Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed
 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your

vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and
TRAILER TOWING trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
condition.
ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale In this section you will find safety tips and The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
to ensure that it is not over the GVWR. information on limits to the type of towing you can your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
vehicle separately. It is important that you trailer, carefully review this information to tow your the scale.
distribute the load evenly over the front and rear load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
axles.
coverage, follow the requirements and The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards
recommendations in this manual concerning and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or
vehicles used for trailer towing. and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not 4
suspension components do not necessarily
exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 68.
increase the vehicle's GVWR. COMMON T OWING D EFINITIONS
LOADING The following trailer towing related definitions will
WARNING!
assist you in understanding the following It is important that you do not exceed the
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its
information: maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store
heavier items down low and be sure you distribute Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) driving condition can result if either rating is
their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your and have a collision.
items securely before driving. If weighing the vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
either GAWR, but the total load is within the so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 68. Tongue Weight (TW)
specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your the load on your vehicle.
and the way the brakes operate. vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE:
Trailer Frontal Area
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
the B-pillar or the rear of the driver's door for your
of all cargo, consumables and equipment
vehicle's GVWR and GAWR.
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) Weight-Distributing Hitch

WARNING!
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that The weight-distributing hitch works by applying
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the leverage through spring (load) bars. They are  An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer Hitch system may reduce handling, stability,
friction associated with the telescoping motion to tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and braking performance, and could result in a
dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with collision.
while traveling. the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a  Weight Distributing Systems may not be
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a more level ride, offering more consistent steering compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
swaying trailer and automatically applies individual and brake control thereby enhancing towing Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway. control also dampens sway caused by traffic and dealer for additional information.
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
Weight-Carrying Hitch vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer Sway Control
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue (TSC) and a weight distributing (load equalizing) TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue The following chart provides the industry standard
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. Weights (TW) and may be required depending on for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch
These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply class can tow and should be used to assist you in
small and medium sized trailers. with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended
requirements. towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
See chart on Ú page 71 for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (M AXIMUM CAUTION! TOWING REQUIREMENTS

TRAILER WEIGHT R ATINGS) Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
NOTE: the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the drivetrain components, the following guidelines
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads are recommended.
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear
can cause the trailer to sway severely side to CAUTION!
addresses:
 ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/ side which will cause loss of control of the  Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
 ramtruck.ca (Canada) in front is the cause of many trailer collisions. The engine, axle or other parts could be
 rambodybuilder.com damaged. 4
TRAILER AND TONGUE W EIGHT Consider the following items when computing the  Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
 The tongue weight of the trailer.
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch. throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
 The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
ment put in or on your vehicle.
 The weight of the driver and all passengers.
Perform the maintenance listed in Scheduled
NOTE: Servicing for the proper maintenance intervals
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer Ú page 184. When towing a trailer, never exceed
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Infor-
mation placard for the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo for your vehicle
Weight Distribution Ú page 213.
 For further information Ú page 209.

WARNING! WARNING!
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
 Make certain that the load is secured in the  Total weight must be distributed between the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When  Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, following four ratings are not exceeded: or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
 GVWR and possible personal injury.
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.  GTW  An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer with
 When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not  GAWR
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
can cause a loss of control, poor performance
utilized. brake system, an electronic brake controller is
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
not required.
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure
or tires. Towing Requirements — Tires  Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers
 Safety chains must always be used between  Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the compact spare tire.
chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle  Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when WARNING!
hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer towing while using a full size spare tire.
tongue and allow enough slack for turning  Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
 Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
corners. the safe and satisfactory operation of your brake system and cause it to fail. You might
 Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on vehicle. not have brakes when you need them and
a grade. When parking, apply the parking  Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation could have an accident.
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle pressures before trailer usage.
transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive  Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
 Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire distance. When towing, you should allow for
vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in
damage before towing a trailer. additional space between your vehicle and the
NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the trailer
wheels.  When replacing tires with a higher load carrying vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
capacity they will not increase the vehicle's result in an accident.
 GCWR must not be exceeded. GVWR and GAWR limits.
(Continued)
NOTE:
CAUTION!
 Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg) vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do into water.
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
 Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
area.
distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And

Wiring Seven-Pin Connector 4
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer 1 — Battery
size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are 2 — Backup Lamps
required for motoring safety. 3 — Right Stop/Turn
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and 4 — Electric Brakes
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved 5 — Ground
trailer harness and connector. 6 — Left Stop/Turn
NOTE: Four-Pin Connector 7 — Running Lamps
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
1 — Ground
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
2 — Park TOWING TIPS
3 — Left Stop/Turn
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
connector. Refer to the following illustrations. 4 — Right Stop/Turn backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission Cruise Control — If Equipped RECREATIONAL TOWING — AUTOMATIC

The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The  Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads. TRANSMISSION
transmission controls include a drive strategy to  When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, use wheels are OFF the ground. This may be
disengage until you can get back to cruising
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
speed.
select a lower gear range. using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
 Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
NOTE: 1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
loads to maximize fuel efficiency. following the dolly manufacturer's
Using a lower gear range while operating the
instructions.
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will
improve performance and extend transmission life
RECREATIONAL TOWING 2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. (BEHIND MOTORHOME) 3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the
This action will also provide better engine braking. transmission in PARK.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly,
 When using the ERS shift control, select the ANOTHER VEHICLE following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
highest gear that allows for adequate perfor- 5. Release the parking brake.
mance and avoids frequent downshifts. For Towing Wheels OFF Automatic
example, choose “5” if the desired speed can be Condition The Ground Transmission
maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if needed to CAUTION!
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
maintain the desired speed.  DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
Front OK
 To prevent excess heat generation, avoid Dolly Tow drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle Rear NOT ALLOWED towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF
speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at On Trailer ALL OK the ground.
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or
 Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
vehicle speed when grade and road conditions
NOTE: requirements can cause severe transmission
allow.
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable damage. Damage from improper towing is not
state and provincial laws. Contact state and covered under the New Vehicle Limited
provincial Highway Safety offices for additional Warranty.
details.
DRIVING TIPS Traction DRIVING THROUGH WATER

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible Driving through water more than a few inches/
DRIVING ON S LIPPERY SURFACES for a wedge of water to build up between the tire centimeters deep will require extra caution to
and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Acceleration cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the Flowing/Rising Water
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to following precautions should be observed:
pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon WARNING!
 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads
occurs when there is a difference in the surface Do not drive on or across a road or path where
are slushy.
traction under the front (driving) wheels. water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm
 Slow down if the road has standing water or 4
run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road
WARNING! puddles.
or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink
 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden first become visible. rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly.
pulling of the front wheels. You could lose  Keep tires properly inflated. Failure to follow this warning may result in
control of the vehicle and possibly have a  Maintain sufficient distance between your
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a passengers, and others around you.
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, collision in a sudden stop.
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Shallow Standing Water

CAUTION! CAUTION!
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following  Always check the depth of the standing water  Driving through standing water may cause
Cautions and Warnings before doing so. before driving through it. Never drive through damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
standing water that is deeper than the bottom nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
WARNING! of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
 Driving through standing water limits your  Determine the condition of the road or the
or foamy in appearance) after driving through
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed path that is under water and if there are any
standing water. Do not continue to operate
5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through obstacles in the way before driving through
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated,
standing water. the standing water.
as this may result in further damage. Such
 Driving through standing water limits your  Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases through standing water. This will minimize Limited Warranty.
stopping distances. Therefore, after driving wave effects.
 Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
through standing water, drive slowly and (Continued) cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause
lightly press on the brake pedal several times serious internal damage to the engine. Such
to dry the brakes. damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
 Failure to follow these warnings may result in Limited Warranty.
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
77
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS and performance of your systems or to reduce the
potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
NOTE:
 FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
For detailed information about your Uconnect to your vehicle systems. directly regarding software updates.
system, refer to Ú page 87. The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to  To help further improve vehicle security and
NOTE: your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
Uconnect screen images are for illustration most recent version of vehicle software (such as vehicle owners should:
purposes only and may not reflect exact software Uconnect software) is installed.
for your vehicle.  Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/
WARNING! support/software-update.html (US Resi-
CYBERSECURITY  It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
dents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian
Residents) to learn about available 5
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems Uconnect software updates.
be equipped with both wired and wireless are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
 Only connect and use trusted media
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to systems, including safety related systems,
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
send and receive information. This information could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
USBs, CDs).
allows systems and features in your vehicle to could occur that may result in an accident
function properly. involving serious injury or death. Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security  ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or CD) into your intercept information and private communications
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media without your consent Ú page 52.
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless of unknown origin could possibly contain mali-
communications. Vehicle software technology cious software, and if installed in your vehicle,
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes systems to be breached.
appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
 As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
computer or other devices, your vehicle may
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
require software updates to improve the usability
authorized dealer immediately.
78 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SETTINGS UCONNECT 3/3 NAV S ETTINGS Push the Settings button on the faceplate to
display the menu setting screen. In this mode, the
The Uconnect system uses a combination of Uconnect system allows you to access
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the programmable features that may be equipped.
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
NOTE:
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features.  Only one category may be selected at a time.
Many features can vary by vehicle.  The Back Arrow will change into a Done button if
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or any changes are made.
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the When making a selection, press one button on the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/ touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn the desired menu, press and release the preferred
the control knob to scroll through menus and setting option until a check mark appears next to
change settings. Push the center of the control the setting, showing that setting has been
knob one or more times to select or change a Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Buttons On The selected. Once the setting is complete, either
setting. Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate press the Back Arrow button to return to the
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off previous menu, or press the X button on the
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or down through the available settings.
tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button to exit out of a menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
The NAV button in the middle of your Uconnect
System may also contain the word CAMERA.
MULTIMEDIA 79
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will
display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available
Language
languages are English, Français, and Español.
Display
5
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:

This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
Display Mode
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “With
Brightness Headlights On” setting will increase or decrease the brightness with the
headlight on; the “With Headlights Off” will increase or decrease the
brightness with the headlights off.
80 MULTIMEDIA

Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
This setting will turn on or off the Trip B display on the Instrument Cluster
Display Trip B
Display.
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in
the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:

This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
US
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
The setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel
Custom Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi,
kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
MULTIMEDIA 81
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:

This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system.
Voice Response Length When set to “Brief”, the system provides a shortened audio description. When
set to “Long”, the system provides the full audio description from the system.
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “w/Help” setting will show the
Show Command List 5
Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
Clock & Date

When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:

This setting will sync the time to the system’s GPS receiver. The system will
Sync Time
control the time via GPS location.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). “Sync Time” must
Set Time & Format/Time Format be off for this setting to be available. The “12 h” setting will set the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 h” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
82 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will allow you to set the date. The selectable options are “Date”,
Set Date
“Month”, and “Year”. You can also change the clock settings.
Show Time Status This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Safety/Assistance
When the Safety/Assistance button is pressed, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s safety settings. The option will differ depending on the
features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within sub-folders on the screen. To access a sub-folder, select the desired folder; the
available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:

This setting will add a delay to the backup camera when shifting out of
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
REVERSE.
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:
 When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country
of the vehicle purchased.
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 83
Doors & Locks

When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:

This setting will sound the horn when the key fob’s Lock button is pushed. The
“Off” setting will not sound the horn. The “1st Press” setting will sound the
Sound Horn With Lock
horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound
the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the
Auto Door Locks 5
vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h).
Key Off/Engine Off Options

When the Key Off/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shut off. These settings will only
activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:

This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the radio remains on after
the vehicle has been turned off. The “0 min” setting will shut the radio off the
Radio Off Delay moment the vehicle is turned off. The “20 min” setting will leave the radio on
for 20 minutes after the vehicle has been turned off or until one of the doors
has been opened.
84 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play music from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:

Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back
Balance and left/right of the vehicle. The “Speaker” icon can be moved to set audio
location.
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting,
Speed Adjusted Volume the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings
are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
This setting will set how the radio behaves when the ignition is switched to
Auto-On Radio
ON/RUN. The available settings are “On”, “Off”, and “Recall Last”.
MULTIMEDIA 85
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:

Paired Phones/Devices This setting will show which phones are paired to the Phone system.
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped

When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. These settings can be used 5
to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
 A subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio is required for these settings to be functional.
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a
Tune Start
music channel using one of the 12 presets.
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will
Channel Skip
display of the skipped channels.
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel
Subscription Information
Link is a separate subscription.
86 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Settings — If Equipped

When the Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its factory
settings. This setting can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:

This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
Restore Settings to Default
default.
Clear Personal Data

When the Clear Personal Data button is pressed on the touchscreen, a pop-up will display asking if you would like to clear all personal data from the system.
NOTE:

This setting will display a pop-up that provides the option to clear all personal
Clear Personal Data
data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
MULTIMEDIA 87
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION NOTE:

Uconnect screen images are for illustration
I DENTIFYING YOUR RADIO purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display

1 — Screen Off Button
2 — Mute Button
3 — Back Button
4 — Settings Button
5 — Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob
6 — Volume & On/Off Button
7 — Radio Button
8 — Media Button
9 — NAV/CAMERA Button
10 — Phone Button
11 — More Button
88 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Settings Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings.
Back Push the Back button to return to a previous page.
Push the Enter/Browse button to accept a highlighted selection on the
Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob screen. Rotate the Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a
radio station.
More Push the More button to access additional options such as “Trip” and “Clock”.
Push the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
Phone
phone system.
Push the Camera button to access the vehicle’s camera system. If equipped,
NAV/CAMERA press the NAV button to access Navigation Mode, the system’s built-in
navigation feature.
Push the Media button to enter Media Mode and access controls for external
Media
audio sources.
Push the Radio button to enter Radio Mode and access the system’s radio
Radio
functions.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off
Volume & On/Off
button to turn the system on or off.
Push the Mute button to turn the audio of the radio system off. Press it again
Mute
to turn the audio on.
Screen Off Push the Screen Off button to turn the screen on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 89
SAFETY AND GENERAL I NFORMATION  Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Care And Maintenance
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to
Touchscreen
Safety Guidelines the product. Return it to an authorized dealer to
repair.  Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or
WARNING! sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.)
 Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a
which could scratch the touchscreen surface!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the level that still allows you to hear outside traffic
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and and emergency vehicles.  Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
assume all risks related to the use of the directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do  Your system is a sophisticated electronic the touchscreen.
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident device. Do not let young children use your  If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
involving serious injury or death. system. with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
 Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu-
your music or sound system at loud volumes. tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent
5
CAUTION! Exercise caution when setting the volume on manufacturer's precautions and directions
your system. Ú page 236.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen,
doing so can result in breaking the touchscreen.  Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture
away from your system. Besides damage to your
system, moisture can cause electric shocks as
Please read the manual carefully before using the with any electronic device.
system. It contains instructions on how to use the
system in a safe and effective manner. NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed
Please read and follow these safety precautions.
dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
Failure to do so may result in injury or property
use some of the touchscreen features while the
damage.
vehicle is in motion.
 Glance at the screen only when it is safe to do
so. If prolonged viewing of the screen is
required, park in a safe location and set the
parking brake.
90 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT MODES The radio is equipped with the following modes: SEEK FUNCTIONS
 FM Seek Up And Seek Down
RADIO MODE  AM
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek
Operating Radio Mode  SiriusXM® Radio
Down button on the touchscreen to tune the
Push the Radio button on the faceplate to enter radio to the next available station or channel. If the
the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, FM/ radio reaches the starting station after passing
AM/SXM, can then be selected by pressing the through the entire band two times, the radio will
corresponding buttons on the touchscreen in the stop at the station where it began.
Radio mode.
Fast Seek Up And Fast Seek Down
SWITCHING THE SYSTEM ON/OFF
Press, hold, and then release the Seek Up or
The screen will switch on/off when the Volume & Seek Down button on the touchscreen to
On/Off button is pushed. advance the radio through the available stations or
VOLUME/POWER channels at a faster rate. The radio stops at the
next available station or channel when the button
Rotate the Volume knob to adjust the volume. on the touchscreen is released.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Radio Mode NOTE:
be set at the same volume level as last played.
1 — Preset Buttons Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Push the On/Off button to turn the system on or
2 — All Presets Button off. Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
3 — Radio Band Button (FM/AM/SXM)
ENTER/BROWSE AND TUNE/SCROLL
4 — Seek Down Button
CONTROL
5 — Direct Tune Button
6 — Info Button Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio
7 — Seek Up Button
station frequency.
8 — Audio Settings Button
MULTIMEDIA 91
DIRECT TUNE SETTING THE PRESETS SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
are activated by pressing any of the four Preset
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
commit into memory, press and hold the desired
Manual kit.
numbered button for more that two seconds or
until you hear a confirmation beep. SiriusXM® services require subscriptions sold
separately after the trial included with the new
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
Radio modes. Four presets are visible at the top of
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
the radio screen.
plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
Direct Tune Pressing the All button on the radio home screen
will display all of the preset stations for that mode.
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at 5
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the 866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM®
radio screen to directly tune to a desired radio Customer Agreement for complete terms at
SIRIUSXM® SATELLITE RADIO MODE
station or channel. www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca
(Canada). All fees and programming subject to
Press the available number button on the
change. Our satellite service is available to those
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station.
at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous US and
Once a number has been entered, any numbers
D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also
that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be
available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
reached) will become deactivated/grayed out.
coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is
INFO available throughout our satellite service area and
in AK. © 2021 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM®
Press the Info button to display the current track and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
information. Press the X button to cancel this SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
feature.
This functionality is only available for radios
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Changing To
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
SiriusXM®
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
92 MULTIMEDIA
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might When in Satellite mode:
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to  The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio lighted.
does not receive a signal in underground parking
garages or tunnels.  The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top
of the screen.
No Subscription
 The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a the center.
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the
Radio does not have the necessary subscription,  The Program Information is displayed at the
the Radio is able to receive the Preview channel bottom of the Channel Number.
only.  The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription below the Program Information.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display SiriusXM®
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by Satellite Radio
subscription, US visit www.UconnectPhone.com or Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
call: In addition to the tuning operation functions 1 — Browse
common to all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/ 2 — Radio Bands
1-800-643-2112
Weather button, and Favorite button functions are 3 — Direct Tune
Canada visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call: available in SiriusXM® Mode. 4 — Info Button
1-800-465-2001 (English) 5 — Next Button
1-800-387-9983 (French)
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
MULTIMEDIA 93
Replay
The Replay function provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched, content
in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay mode.
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing

Play/Pause of live or rewound content at any time. Play can be resumed again by
pressing the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen.
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in
steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen
Rewind
for more than two seconds rewinds the content. The radio begins
playing the content at the point at which the press is released. 5
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen forwards the
content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be
done when the content is previously rewound, and therefore, cannot be
Forward
done for live content. A continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio begins playing the
content at the point at which the press is released.
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the playing of live
Live
content.
94 MULTIMEDIA
Favorites This screen contains many submenus. You can exit Remove Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to a submenu to return to a parent menu by pressing Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
activate the Favorites Menu, which will time out the Back arrow. screen. Press the Delete All button on the
within 20 seconds in absence of user interaction. All touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be
button. pressing the All button, the following categories deleted.
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite become available: Alert Settings
artist or song that is currently playing. The radio  Channel List Press the Channel List to display all Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
then uses this information to alert you when either the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu allows
the favorite artist or song is being played at any the Channel List by pressing the Up and Down you to choose from a visual alert or audible and
time by any of the SiriusXM® Channels. arrows located on the right side of the screen. visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on
The maximum number of favorites that can be Scrolling can also be done by operating the any of the SiriusXM® channels.
stored in the Radio is 50. TUNE/SCROLL knob. Game Zone
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a  Genre Press the Genre button on the touch- Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of
favorite artist, press the Favorites button on the screen to display a list of Genres. You can select the Browse screen. This feature provides you with
touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist button on any desired Genre by pressing the Genre List; the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and
the touchscreen. the radio tunes to a channel with the content in set alerts.
the selected Genre.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a On-Air
favorite song, press the Favorites button on the Favorites
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
touchscreen and then the Favorite Song button on Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen. On-Air List provides a list of Channels currently
the touchscreen. The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the airing any of the items in the Selections List, and
Browse In SXM Favorites List and to configure the Alert Settings, pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to along with providing a list of Channels currently to that channel.
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump airing any of the items in the Favorites List.
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM® You can scroll the Favorites List by pressing the Up
Channel List. and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the
TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
MULTIMEDIA 95
Add/Delete — If Equipped Alert Settings AUDIO SETTINGS

Press the Add/Delete button on the touchscreen to Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. Press the Audio button within the settings main
activate the League Scroll List. Press the chosen The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
league and a scroll list of all teams within the “Alert me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert
league will appear, then you can select a team by upon score update” or both when one or more of
pressing the corresponding box. A check mark your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
appears for all teams that are chosen. channels.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon Tune Start
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the Tune Start begins playing the current song from
screen. Press the Delete All button on the the beginning when you tune to a music channel
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or press using one of the 12 presets. This feature occurs
the Trash Can icon next to the selection to be the first time the preset is selected during that
deleted. current song. 5
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound
5 — Loudness
6 — AUX Volume Offset
7 — Radio Off With Door
96 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Setting Description

Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between
the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
Balance/Fade
Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right button or press and drag the red Speaker
icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Press the + or – button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease
Equalizer each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or
minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, or
“3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation
Speed Adjusted Volume
to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise.
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction
Surround Sound
as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This alters the
AUX Volume Offset AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus
three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is
Auto Play connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press
“Off” to turn the setting off.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the
Radio Off With Door driver or passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay selected time
has expired.
MULTIMEDIA 97
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS MEDIA M ODE AUDIO SOURCE SELECTION

Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or Once in Media Mode, press the Source button and
Operating Media Mode
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like the desired mode button. USB, AUX and
to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM® Bluetooth® are the Media sources available. You
Satellite Radio trial required.) can select the Browse button to be given these
options:
Push the VR button and wait for the beep to say
a command. See some examples below.  Now Playing
 “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”  Artists
 “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”  Albums
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of  Genres
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,  Songs
push the VR button and say “Help”. The system  Playlists
5
provides you with a list of commands.
 Folders
Media Operation You can select the Source button, Play/Pause
button, or the Info button for artist information on
1 — Seek Down Button current song playing.
2 — Seek Up Button
3 — Browse Button SEEK UP/SEEK DOWN
4 — Source Button Seek Up /Seek Down
5 — Play/Pause Button
Press and release the Right Arrow button on the
6 — Info Button
touchscreen for the next selection. Press and
7 — Next Button
release the Left Arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
Media Mode is entered by pushing the Media current selection, or return to the beginning of the
button located on the faceplate. previous selection if the track is within the first few
seconds of the current selection.
98 MULTIMEDIA
Fast Seek Up /Fast Seek Down USB Mode Bluetooth® Mode

Press and hold the Right Arrow or Left Arrow USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
button on the touchscreen and the desired mode Jump Drive cable into the USB port or by pushing paired with the Uconnect Phone to communicate
will begin to fast forward or reverse through the the Media button located on the faceplate. Once in with the Uconnect system Ú page 101.
current track until the button on the touchscreen is Media Mode, press the Source button on the Once the Bluetooth® device is paired to the
released. touchscreen and select “USB”. Uconnect system, push the Media button located
NOTE: on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode, press the
TRACK SELECTION (BROWSE) The system supports only FAT32 or ExFAT formatted Source button on the touchscreen and select
Rotate the Browse button to scroll through and USB devices. The system does not support devices Bluetooth®.
select a desired track on the device or USB. Press with a capacity higher than 64GB. The system does NOTE:
the Exit button on the touchscreen if you wish to not support USB hubs connected to the USB port of For mobile phone compatibility and pairing instruc-
cancel the browse function. the vehicle. Connect your multimedia device directly tions, please visit UconnectPhone.com.
to the USB port using the specific connection cable
REPEAT for the device if necessary. AUX Mode
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to Inserting USB Device AUX Mode is entered by inserting a AUX device
repeat the song selection. To cancel repeat, press using a stereo cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into
Gently insert the USB device into the USB port. If
the Repeat button on the touchscreen a second the AUX port or by pushing the MEDIA button
you insert a USB device with the ignition ON, the
time. located on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode,
unit will switch to USB Mode and begin to play. The
press the Source button on the touchscreen and
display will show the track number and index time
SHUFFLE select AUX.
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to of track 1. To insert an Auxiliary Device, gently insert the
play the selections on the USB or Bluetooth® Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you
Browse
device in random order to provide an interesting insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to radio on, the unit will switch to AUX mode and
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off. select Artist, Album, Genre, Song, Playlist or Folder begin to play.
from the USB device. Once the desired selection is
INFO made, you can chose from the available media by
pressing the button on the touchscreen. Press the
Press the Info button to display the current track
Exit button on the touchscreen if you wish to cancel
information. Press the X button to cancel this
the browse function.
feature.
MULTIMEDIA 99
Controlling The Auxiliary Device how the artist, album, song, and genre information Screen Activated Features
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting is displayed.  Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be PHONE MODE  Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
provided by the radio; use the device controls displayed on the touchscreen.
instead. Adjust the volume with the Volume rotary Overview
knob, or with the volume of the attached device.  Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
NOTE: in-vehicle communications system. Uconnect
Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your  Viewing and Calling contacts from recent call
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the mobile phone. logs.
volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too Uconnect Phone supports the following features:  Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the Messages.
Voice Activated Features
radio unit to play the music on the device.  Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy
 Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith 5
Voice Commands Media access to connect to them quickly.
Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®, NOTE:
 Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
and Auxiliary ports. Voice operation is only Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
available for connected USB and AUX devices. incoming SMS messages. Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
 Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward properly.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
the following commands and follow the prompts to Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through
incoming calls/text messages. your vehicle’s audio system; the system will
switch your media source or choose an artist.
 Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”). automatically mute your radio when using the
 “Change source to Bluetooth®” Uconnect Phone.
 Calling back the last incoming call number (“Call
 “Change source to AUX” Back”). For Uconnect customer support:
 “Change source to USB”  Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming  US — visit UconnectPhone.com or call
 “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed 877-855-8400
Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
 Canada — visit UconnectPhone.com or call
Classical”  Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for
800-465-2001 (English)
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the John Smith Mobile”).
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB 800-387-9983 (French)
device. Your Voice Command must match exactly  Visit UconnectPhone.com
100 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls Uconnect Phone Button You will be prompted for a specific command and
between the system and your mobile phone as you The Uconnect Phone button on your steering wheel then guided through the available options.
enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute is used to get into the phone mode and make calls,  Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait
the system's microphone for private conversation. show recent, incoming or outgoing calls, view for the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt
phonebook, etc. When you press the button you or another prompt.
WARNING! will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your signal to give a  For certain operations, compound commands
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the command. can be used. For example, instead of saying
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and Uconnect Voice Command Button “Call” and then “John Smith” and then “mobile”,
assume all risks related to the use of the the following compound command can be said:
The Uconnect Voice Command button on your
Uconnect features and applications in this “Call John Smith mobile.”
steering wheel is only used for “barge in” and when
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
you are already in a call or want to make another  For each feature explanation in this section,
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
call. only the compound command form of the voice
involving serious injury or death.
The button on your steering wheel is also used to command is given. You can also break the
access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect commands into parts and say each part of the
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Voice Command features. command when you are asked for it. For
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. example, you can use the compound command
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the Phone Operation form voice command “Search for John Smith,”
global standard that enables different electronic or you can break the compound command form
devices to connect to each other without wires or a OPERATION into two voice commands: “Search Contacts”
docking station. Ensure you phone is turned on Voice commands can be used to operate the and when asked, “John Smith.” Please
with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the remember, the Uconnect Phone works best
vehicle's Uconnect Phone. The Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone menu structure. Voice commands when you talk in a normal conversational tone,
allows up to 10 mobile phones or audio devices to are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts. as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) There are two general methods for how Voice meters away from you.
mobile phone and one audio device can be used Command works:
with the system at a time.
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
MULTIMEDIA 101
NATURAL SPEECH To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply

push the Phone button (if active) on your steering
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural
wheel and say a command or say “Help”. All
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a push of the
Natural speech allows the user to speak VR button or Phone button on the radio faceplate.
commands in phrases or complete sentences. The
system filters out certain non-word utterances and CANCEL COMMAND
sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The system handles
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel”
fill-in words such as “I would like to”.
and you will be returned to the main menu.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
You can also push the VR button or Phone button
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone call” Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display
on your steering wheel when the system is listening
and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in the
for a command and be returned to the main or
same phrase or sentence, the system identifies NOTE:
previous menu.
the topic or context and provides the associated  You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your 5
follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE phone to complete this procedure.
call?” in the case where a phone call was PHONE  The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
requested but the specific name was not
recognized. To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair Follow the steps below to pair your phone:
your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled mobile 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the phone. Mobile phone pairing is the process of
system requires more information from the user, it position.
establishing a wireless connection between a
will ask a question to which the user can respond cellular phone and the Uconnect system. 2. Press the Phone button.
without pushing the Voice Recognition (VR) button
To complete the pairing process, you will need to NOTE:
on the steering wheel.
reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please  If there are no phones currently connected
HELP COMMAND visit UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
phone compatibility information. if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want
to know your options at any prompt, say “Help”  This pop-up only appears when the user
following the beep. enters phone mode and no other device(s)
have previously been paired. If the system
102 MULTIMEDIA
has a phone previously paired, even if no 9. When the pairing process has successfully You can also use the following VR command to
phone is currently connected with the completed, the system will prompt you to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen
system, this pop-up will not appear. choose whether or not this is your favorite on the radio:
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone  “Show Paired Phones”
the highest priority. This phone will take
4. Search for available devices on your precedence over other paired phones within NOTE:
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. range and will connect to the Uconnect system Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect
 Press the Settings button on your mobile automatically when entering the vehicle. Only system may interfere with the Bluetooth®
phone. one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth® connection. If this happens, simply repeat the
audio device can be connected to the pairing process. However, first, make sure to
 Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected, delete the device from the list of phones on your
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
will begin to search for Bluetooth® connec- simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile
phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s
tions. Bluetooth® settings.
the Uconnect system will reconnect to the
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to Bluetooth® device.
pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or PAIR A BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
Settings button from the Uconnect Phone NOTE: DEVICE
main screen. For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which 1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
 Press the Paired Phones button. begin.
it was paired. The latest phone paired will have the
 Search for available devices on your higher priority. 2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see 3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
below). When prompted on the phone, NOTE: touchscreen to display the Paired Audio
select “Uconnect” and accept the connec- During the pairing procedure, you may receive a Devices screen.
tion request. pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
System to access your “messages” and “contacts”. 4. Press the Add Device button on the
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress touchscreen.
screen while the system is connecting. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect System. NOTE:
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
If there is no device currently connected with the
system, select “Uconnect.”
system, a pop-up will appear.
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept
the connection request from Uconnect Phone.
MULTIMEDIA 103
5. Search for available devices on your 1. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen. 2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When 2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources button.
prompted on the device, or confirm the PIN buttons. 3. Press the Settings button located to the right
shown on the Uconnect screen. of the device name for a different phone or
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process particular audio device. A pop-up menu will audio device than the currently connected
screen while the system is connecting. appear; press “Connect Phone”. device or press the preferred Connected
7. When the pairing process has successfully Phone from the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
completed, the system will prompt you to 4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
choose whether or not this is your favorite DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR 5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device AUDIO DEVICE Device button on the touchscreen.
the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within 6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
range.
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A 5
NOTE: FAVORITE
For devices which are not made a favorite, the 1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources screen,
device priority is determined by the order in which press the Settings button located to the right
it was paired. The latest device paired will have the of the device name for a different phone or
higher priority. audio device than the currently connected
You can also use a following VR command to bring device or press the preferred Connected
up a list of paired audio devices: Phone from the list.
 “Show Paired Phones” 2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
1 — Disconnect Device or Disconnect Phone
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE 2 — Make Favorite touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING 3 — Delete Device/Phone move to the top of the list.
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the 4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device 1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
within range. If you need to choose a particular button.
phone or audio device follow these steps:
104 MULTIMEDIA
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC then, if available, the previously downloaded TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE phonebook is available for use.
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED  Only the phonebook of the currently connected the Phone main screen.
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has mobile phone is accessible. 2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon next to the
the ability to download contact names and number  This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited contact you want to remove from your
entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook. or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can favorites. This will bring up the options for that
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook only be edited on the mobile phone. The Favorite contact.
Access Profile may support this feature. Your changes are transferred and updated to 3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking for Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection.
permission for the Uconnect System to access your Phone Call Features
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED The following features can be accessed through the
will sync your contacts with the Uconnect System. There are two ways you can add an entry to your Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, favorites: supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service
for supported phones. 1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press plan. For example, if your mobile service plan
the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and provides three-way calling, this feature can be
 To call a name from a downloaded mobile
then press one of the +Add Favorite Contact accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with
phonebook, follow the procedure in the “Voice
buttons that appears on the list. your mobile service provider for the features that you
Command” in this section.
have.
 Automatic download and update of a phone- 2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
Contacts from the Phone main screen, and Listed below are the phone options with Uconnect
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
then select the appropriate number. Press the Phone:
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made
to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you Down Arrow button next to the selected  Redial
start the vehicle. number to display the options pop-up. In the  Dial by pressing in the number
pop-up, select “Add to Favorites”.
 A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four  Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
numbers per contact will be downloaded and NOTE: Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
updated every time a phone is connected to the If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
 Favorites
Uconnect Phone. remove an existing favorite.
 Mobile Phonebook
 Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay before  Recent Call Log
the latest downloaded names can be used. Until  SMS Message Viewer
MULTIMEDIA 105
CALL CONTROLS KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
The touchscreen allows you to control the following 1. Press the Phone button. NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
call features: 2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
touchscreen. Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio
system. Push the Uconnect Phone button on the
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
steering wheel, press the Answer button on the
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreen.
touchscreens to enter the number and press
Dial/Call.
RECENT CALLS
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of
the following call types: 5
 All Calls
 Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display  Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
1 — Answer  Missed Calls
2 — Mute/Unmute  Calls without a reply
3 — Ignore These can be accessed by pressing the Recent Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display
4 — Transfer Calls button on the phone main screen.
1 — Answer Button
You can also push the VR button on your steering
2 — Caller ID Box
Other phone call features include: wheel and perform the above operation. For
 End Call
example, say “Show my incoming calls”.
 Hold/Unhold/Resume
 Swap two active calls
106 MULTIMEDIA
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL — Automatic reply messages can be: To go back to the first call: Ú page 106
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS  “I am driving right now, I will get back to you To combine two calls: Ú page 106
If a call is currently in progress and you have shortly.”
another incoming call, you will hear the same
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
 Create a custom auto reply message up to
network tones for call waiting that you normally 160 characters.
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
NOTE:
Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel,
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
press the Caller ID box to place the current call on
hold and answer the incoming call. While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
NOTE: without being interrupted by incoming calls.
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support NOTE:
rejecting an incoming call when another call is in  Reply with text message is not compatible with
progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an iPhones®.
incoming call or ignore it.  Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® Message If two calls are in progress (one active and one on
DO NOT DISTURB Access Profile (MAP). hold), press the Swap Calls button on the Phone
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold
from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD at a time.
your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold You can also push the Phone button to toggle
your convenience, there is a counter display to button on the Phone main screen. between the active and held phone call.
keep track of your missed calls and text messages
while Do Not Disturb is active MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT JOIN CALLS
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text CALL IS IN PROGRESS When two calls are in progress (one active and one
message, a call, or both when declining an You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls Call button
incoming call and send it to voicemail. button on the Phone main screen, then dial a the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a
number from the keypad, recent calls, SMS Inbox conference call.
or from the phonebooks.
MULTIMEDIA 107
CALL TERMINATION Advanced Phone Connectivity  Smooth Road Surface

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the  Fully Closed Windows
End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
 Dry Weather Conditions
End button on the steering wheel. Only the active PHONE
call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be WARNING!
hold, it will become the new active call. transferred from your mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone without terminating the call. To ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
REDIAL transfer an ongoing call from your connected wheel. You have full responsibility and assume
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa, all risks related to the use of the Uconnect
Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or
press the Transfer button on the Phone main features and applications in this vehicle. Only
push the VR button and after the “Listening”
screen. use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
do so may result in an accident involving serious
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that Things You Should Know About Uconnect injury or death.
was dialed from your mobile phone. Phone 5
CALL CONTINUATION Even though the system is designed for many
VOICE COMMAND
languages and accents, the system may not always
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call For the best performance: work for some.
on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition
has been switched to OFF.  Always wait for the beep before speaking NOTE:
 Speak normally, without pausing, just as you It is recommended that you do not store names in
NOTE: your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system motion.
meters away from you
until the phone becomes out of range for the
Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to  Ensure that no one other than you is speaking Number and name recognition rate is optimized
press the Transfer button on the touchscreen during a voice command period when the entries are not similar. You can say “O”
when leaving the vehicle. (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
 Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Even though international dialing for most number
 Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
 Low Road Noise number combinations may not be supported.
108 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Performance  “Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
Audio quality is maximized under:  “Call back” (call previous incoming phone RESPONSES
 Low-To-Medium Blower Setting number)
Where are I will be 5 <or
 Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command, Okay.
you? 10, 15, 20,
 Low Road Noise
push the Phone button and say “Call”, then 25, 30, 45,
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your Are you there 60> minutes
 Smooth Road Surface Call me.
phone book. When a contact has multiple phone yet? late.
 Fully Closed Windows numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work”.
I’ll call you I need See you in 5
 Dry Weather Conditions Voice Text Reply — If Equipped later. directions. <or 10, 15,
 Operation From The Driver's Seat Uconnect can announce incoming text messages. 20, 25, 30,
Push the VR button or Phone button and I’m on my way. Can’t talk right 45, 60>
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
say: now. minutes.
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and
network, and not the Uconnect Phone. 1. “Listen” to have the system read an incoming I’m lost. Thanks.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by text message. (Must have compatible mobile
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. phone paired to Uconnect system.) NOTE:
Phone Voice Commands 2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has Only use the numbering listed in the provided
been read. table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose the
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is message.
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is beep, repeat one of the predefined messages Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the
ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile and follow the system prompts. full implementation of the Message Access Profile
phone compatibility and pairing instructions. (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
say a command. See some examples below: RESPONSES
incoming text messages only. For further
 “Call John Smith” Stuck in information on how to enable this feature on your
Yes. See you later.
traffic. Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone® “User
 “Dial 123 456 7890”
Start without Manual”.
No. I’ll be late.
me.
MULTIMEDIA 109
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible POWER-UP Using Search
with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either Press the Search button in the Main menu to
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a
the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language start searching. The search screen will open,
text message.
change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to displaying the keyboard and the following buttons:
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped using the system Ú page 236.
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected
to your vehicle, Siri lets you use your voice to send NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED
text messages, select media, place phone calls
and much more. Siri uses your natural language to OPERATING N AVIGATION M ODE —
understand what you mean and responds back to I F E QUIPPED
confirm your requests. The system is designed to
keep your eyes on the road and your hands on the Planning A Route
wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks. Using the search bar provides a wide range of ways 5
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the to find places and then navigate to them. You can
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the search for your destination in different ways:
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, you  A specific address
can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
 A partial address Navigation Search
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.  A type of place
1 — Back Button
 A zip code 2 — Search Box
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
 A city to navigate to a city center 3 — Type Of Search
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
 A Point of Interest (POI) near your current loca- 4 — View Button
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by tion 5 — 123?! Button
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is  Latitude and longitude coordinates 6 — Keyboard Layout Button
recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode. 7 — List/Map Button
8 — Show/Hide Keyboard Button
110 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Back Button Press the Back button to return to the previous screen.
Enter your search term in the search input box. As you type, matching
Search Box
addresses and Points of Interests (POI) are shown.
Press this button to change the type of search to any of the following:
 Whole Map: Select this option to search your current map with no limit to
the search radius. Your current location is the center of the search. The
results are ranked by exact match.
 Near Me: Select this option to search with your current GPS location as the
search center. The results are ranked by distance.
 In Town or City: Select this option to use a town or city as the center of your
search. Enter the town or city name using the keyboard on the touchscreen.
When you have selected the town or city from the results list, you can search
for an address or POI in that city.
Type Of Search  Along Route: When a route has been planned, you can select this option to
search along your route for a specific type of location, such as a POI cate-
gory. When prompted, enter the type of location and then select it in the
right-hand column to carry out the search.
 Near Destination: When a route has been planned, you can select this
option to use your destination as the center of your search.
 Latitude Longitude: Select this option to enter a pair of latitude and longi-
tude coordinates.
NOTE:
By default, the current map is searched. Once you have used search, the last
search type you selected is used.
View Button Press this button to return to the Map View or Guidance View.
MULTIMEDIA 111
Feature Description
Show/Hide Keyboard Button Press this button to show or hide the keyboard.
Select this button to switch between showing the results in a list or showing
List/Map Button
the results on the map.
Keyboard Layout Button Press this button to change your keyboard layout to another language.
Press this button to use numbers and symbols on your keyboard. Select the
123?! Button =\< button to toggle between the numbers and more symbols. Select the ABC
button to go back to the general keyboard.
Planning A Route — Searching For A City Center 2. Select the Points Of Interest tab. 3. Select the city center POI.
When planning a route to a city center, you can 5
search for a town, city, or postal code.
1. Enter the name of the city or town.
Addresses List City Center

NOTE:
The city center location is shown on the map.
Searching For A City Center
112 MULTIMEDIA
4. Select “Drive”. 2. Select a POI category, such as “Restaurant”. If Planning A Route — Searching By Entering
you select a POI category, only POIs from that Coordinates
category are shown. You can then select an 1. Press the Search Type button.
the desired POI. The location is shown on the
map. 2. Select “Latitude Longitude”.
3. To see more information about the POI, select 3. Type in the pair of coordinates:
the POI on the map and then select the Pop-up  Decimal values
Menu button. Select “More Information” on  Degrees, minutes and seconds
the pop-up menu.
 GPS standard coordinates
4. To plan a route to this destination, select the
Drive button. 4. Select a suggestion for the destination.
5. To plan a route, select the Drive button.
Drive Button
Planning A Route Using The Map
As soon as you start driving, the Guidance View is
shown automatically. 1. Move the map and zoom in until you can see
the desired destination.
Planning A Route — Searching For A POI
2. Select the destination by pressing and holding
You can search for a POI type, such as a restaurant the screen for about one second.
or tourist attraction. Alternatively, you can search
for a specific POI Ú page 123. NOTE:
A pop-up menu shows the nearest address.
1. Use the keyboard to enter the name of the
POI. 3. To plan a route to this destination, select the
Drive Button Drive button.
NOTE:
When searching, the whole map is selected. If you
want to change how the search is done, select the
button to the right of the search box. You can then
change where the search is done. For example,
along the route or in a city.
MULTIMEDIA 113
Planning A Route Using My Places You also have an option to view the parking lots in
1. Select the Main Menu button. a list by pressing the Menu button.
2. Select a parking lot from the map or the list.
2. Select “My Places”.
3. Select the Place you want to navigate to. For
example: Home.
Find A Gas Station

3. Select a gas station from the map or the list. By
opening the pop-up menu, you can add the gas 5
Find A Parking Lot station as a stop on your route. You can also
plan a route to your chosen gas station by
3. To plan a route to your chosen parking lot, pressing the Drive button. Your system will
My Places select the drive button. plan a route, and guidance to your destination
will begin. The Guidance View will be shown
4. To plan a route to this Place, select the Drive Finding A Gas Station automatically once you start driving.
button. 1. Press the Main Menu button.
Finding A Parking Lot 2. Select “Gas Station”.
1. Press the Parking button from the Main NOTE:
Menu. You also have an option to view the gas stations in
a list by pressing the Menu button.
NOTE:
If a route is planned, the map shows parking lots
near your destination. If a route isn’t planned, the
map shows parking lots near your current location.
114 MULTIMEDIA
Changing Your Route

MAKING CHANGES TO YOUR ROUTE
After planning a route, the route and destination can be changed. There are various ways to change the route without the need to completely replan the entire
journey.
To change the current route, press the Current Route button in the main menu.
CURRENT ROUTE MENU
Route Option Description

Press the button to clear the currently planned route. The Current Route
Clear Route
Menu will close, and the screen will return to the Map View.
Press the button while driving on a planned route to show up to three
alternative routes on the Map View. Each alternative route shows the
difference in travel time.
Find Alternative
Select the chosen route by tapping on the time pop-up.
Press “Let’s GO”. Guidance to the destination will automatically begin, and
the Guidance View appears automatically as you begin driving.
Press the button to avoid an unexpected obstacle that is blocking the road
on the route. A new route will be found that avoids blocked roads.
You may be shown a maximum of two alternatives depending on the road
network between you and your destination.
The new route is shown on the Map View with the difference in travel time in a
pop-up.
Avoid Blocked Road
Select the new route by pressing the time pop-up. Guidance to your
destination will resume avoiding blocked roads, and the Guidance View will
appear automatically as you begin driving.
NOTE:
It may not be possible to find an alternative route around the blocked road if
none exists.
MULTIMEDIA 115

Press the button to avoid part of the current route.
You are shown a list of the sections that make up your current route.
Select the section of the route you want to avoid. A pop-up menu will appear
on the map showing the location of the instruction.
To avoid the chosen section of the route, select “Avoid”. A new route is
Avoid Part Of Road
planned that will avoid the chosen route sections, and the new route will
appear in Map View.
NOTE:
To avoid more sections of the route, repeat the steps above. It may not be
possible to find an alternative route around the section if none exists.
Avoid Toll Roads And More Select the button to avoid some types of route features that are on your 5
currently planned route. These include ferries, toll roads and unpaved roads.
Press the button to see a list of turn-by-turn instructions for the planned
route.
The instructions include the following information:
 Current location
 Street names
Show Instructions  Up to two road numbers shown in road signs (if available)
 An instruction arrow
 An instruction description
 The distance between two consecutive instructions
 Exit number
 The full addresses of stops on your route
116 MULTIMEDIA

Press the button to add a stop to the route.
You can add a stop by selecting a point on the map. In Map View, zoom in on
Add Stop To Route the map and press and hold to select a location. Then, select the pop-up
menu button and press “Add to Current Route”.
You route will be recalculated to include your stop.
Press the button to change the type of route used to plan the route. The
route will be recalculated using the new route type selected.
You can select the following types of routes:
 Fastest Route
Change Route Type  Shortest Route
 Most Eco-Friendly Route
 Avoid Interstate Highways
You can set the default route type in the Settings menu.
Press the button to see the list of stops for your current route. You can
change the order of the stops on your route by pressing “Edit Stops”. Use the
Up and Down arrows to change the order of your stops. The route will be
recalculated with the stops in that changed order.
Reorder Stops
NOTE:
You can also delete stops from the route by pressing the Edit Stops button and
then press the Delete button. The stop will be removed from the route, and the
route will be recalculated.
MULTIMEDIA 117

Press button to watch a preview of the planned route or track.
Pay Route or Track Preview NOTE:
This feature is not available while driving.
Stop Route Preview Press button to stop the preview of the planned route.
Voice Command — If Equipped The following example shows how to use voice NOTE:
control to plan a journey to your Home address: If the command is incorrect, say “No” and repeat
ABOUT VOICE COMMAND the command after you hear the prompt and tone
1. Push the Voice Recognition button on the
Instead of pressing the touchscreen to control your again. Your Navigation system plans a route from
steering wheel to turn on the microphone.
Navigation system, you can use your voice to your current location to your destination. To stop
A screen will pop up with examples of com-
control navigation. your Navigation system from listening out for 5
mands. further commands, say “Cancel”.
For example, to switch to 2D view, you can say
NOTE:
“2D view”. Guidance View
Press the Help button in the Main menu then press
To view a list of available commands, press the “What can I say?” to see a full list of commands. The Guidance View is used to guide you along the
Help button in the Main menu and then press route to your destination. As soon as you start
2. When you hear a beep, say a command of your
“What can I say?”. driving, your Navigation system will immediately
choice. For example, you can say “Navigate
home”. start guiding you to your destination with spoken
USING VOICE CONTROL
instructions and visual instructions on the
NOTE:
touchscreen. You can also see your current
WARNING! For accurate results, speak normally without trying
location and details along your route, including 3D
to articulate words in an unnatural way. If there is
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the buildings in some cities. The Guidance View is
excessive road noise, for example, you may need
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume normally in 3D. To show a 2D map with the map
to speak directly into the microphone.
all risks related to the use of the Uconnect moving in your direction of travel, change the 2D
features and applications in this vehicle. Only 3. If the command is correct, say “Yes”. and 3D default settings Ú page 121.
use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to
do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
118 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: 1 — Switch View Button

When you have planned a route and the 3D
2 — Instruction Panel
Guidance View is shown, select the switch view
button to change to the Map View and use the 3 — Route Bar
interactive features. 4 — Zoom Button
5 — Main Menu Button
6 — Speed Panel
7 — Current Location
Guidance View
Feature Description
Select the Switch View button to change between the Map View and the
Switch View Button
Guidance View.
Press this button to view the following information:
 The direction of your next turn
Instruction Panel
 The distance to your next turn
 Lane guidance at some intersections
The Route Bar is shown when you have planned a route. The Route Bar
contains arrival information, such as the estimated time of arrival, the length
Route Bar of drive time from your current location, and information about the next stop,
if you have stops on the route. The bottom of the Route Bar represents the
current location and shows the distance to the next stop on your route.
This symbol shows the current location. By pressing the icon, the location will
Current Location
be saved.
MULTIMEDIA 119
Feature Description
Press the Speed Panel button to view the following information (if available):
 The speed limit at your location
 The name of the street you are driving on
Speed Panel
NOTE:
If you drive more than 3 mph (5 km/h) over the speed limit, the Speed Panel
turns red. If you drive less than 3 mph (5 km/h) over the speed limit, the Speed
Panel turns orange.
Main Menu Button Press the Main Menu button to show the main menu.
Zoom Button Press the zoom in + button to zoom in and the zoom out – button to zoom out.
5
Advanced Lane Guidance As you approach an exit or junction, the lane you
need is shown on the screen and in the instruction
NOTE: panel.
Lane guidance is not available for all intersections
or in all countries. There are two types of lane guidance:
Your Navigation system helps you prepare for  Lane images
highway exits and junctions by showing the correct  Instructions in the status bar
driving lane for your planned route.
Advanced Lane Guidance

120 MULTIMEDIA
Map View 1 — Back Button

The Map View is shown when you have no planned 2 — Switch View Button
route. You can use Map View the same way as you 3 — Zoom Button
might look at a traditional paper map. You can
4 — Main Menu Button
move around the map using gestures, and zoom
using the zoom buttons. The map shows your 5 — Selected Locations
current location and many other locations such as 6 — Current Location
your My Places Ú page 124. 7 — Your Route
Map View
Feature Description
Press the Back button to return to an overview of the route. If no route is
Back Button planned, pressing this button moves the map to put your current location at
the center.
Symbols are used on the map to show the destination and saved places
Ú page 124.
Map symbols include:
Map Symbols  Your destination
 Your home location
 A stop on your route
 A location saved in My Places
Select the Traffic Information button to display information about traffic
Traffic Information — If Equipped
delays.
Press and hold the Selected Location button to select a location on the map.
Selected Location Select the Pop-up Menu button to show options for the location, or select the
Drive button to plan a route to the location.
MULTIMEDIA 121
Feature Description
Current Location This symbol shows your current location on the map.
If you have a planned route, it will appear on the map. You can select the route
Your Route to clear it, change the route type, add a stop, or save changes to your route
Ú page 114.
Main Menu Button Press the Main Menu button to open the main menu.
Zoom Button Press the zoom in + button to zoom in and the zoom out – button to zoom out.
Press the Switch View button to change between the Map View and the
Switch View Button
Guidance View.
Voices  Read Road Numbers Out Loud (if equipped): CHANGING THE VOLUME LEVEL 5
Use this setting to control whether road
To change the volume of your Navigation system,
ABOUT VOICES numbers are read out loud as part of navigation
use the Volume knob on the radio when an
Your Navigation system uses sound for some or all instructions.
instruction is being given.
of the following:  Read Road Sign Information Out Loud (if
equipped): Use this setting to control whether
Settings
 Driving directions
road sign information is read out loud as part of ABOUT SETTINGS
 Warnings that you set navigation instructions.
By selecting “Settings” in the main menu, then You can change the way your Navigation system
 Read Street Names Out Loud (if equipped): Use
selecting “Voices,” you can change the settings for looks and behaves. Most of the settings on your
this setting to control whether street names are
how voice instructions are given. Instruction system can be accessed by pressing the Settings
read out loud as part of navigation instructions.
settings include the following: button in the Main Menu.
 Read Foreign Street Names Out Loud (if
 Read Early Instructions Out Loud: This setting equipped): Use this setting to control whether
allows to you to hear early instructions. For foreign street names are read out loud as part of
example, an early instruction could be, “After navigation instructions.
two miles, take the exit right”.
122 MULTIMEDIA
APPEARANCE  Switch Between Distance And Time Automati- AUTOMATIC ZOOM

cally: Select this setting to control the automatic
To change how your navigation screen looks, Select this setting to control the full screen preview
switching between remaining distance and
select “Appearance” in the settings menu. From when you approach highway exits.
remaining time in the arrival information panel.
here, you can change these features:
GUIDANCE VIEW STYLE
 Switch To Night Colors When Dark: Select this SHOW ON ROUTE
setting to make your system automatically Select this setting to choose between 3D and 2D
In the settings menu, select “Show On Route” to versions of the Guidance View. Both the 2D and 3D
switch to night colors when it gets dark.
see any of the following options in the route bar: Guidance Views move in your direction of travel.
 Automatic Zoom: Select “Automatic Zoom” to
 Parking: Select this setting to see parking lots
change how your system zooms in Guidance In 3D Guidance View, you can choose to use the 3D
on your route. car icon or an arrowhead as the current location
View when you approach a turn or intersection.
Zooming in can make the turn or intersection  Gas Stations: Select this setting to see gas indicator. By default, the 3D Guidance View shows
easier to drive. The following options are avail- stations on your route. the 3D car icon.
able:  Stops: Select this setting to see stops on your
route.
VOICES SETTING
 Zoom in to next turn
Select this setting to change how instructions are
 Based on road type SHOW PREVIEWS OF HIGHWAY EXITS read out loud Ú page 121.
 None Select this setting to control the full screen preview
when you approach highway exits.
ROUTE PLANNING
ARRIVAL INFORMATION Select this setting to control how your system plans
In the settings menu, select “Arrival Information” AUTOMATIC MAP VIEW SWITCHING routes. The following options are available:
to change the following settings: Automatic changing of views is on by default. For  Always Take the Fastest Route
 Show Remaining Distance: Select this setting to example, when an alternative route is being You can choose whether you would like the
show the remaining distance left to travel in the suggested, the map will automatically switch to Navigation system to always default to the
arrival information panel during navigation. Map View, and when you start driving, your map fastest route.
 Show Remaining Time: Select this setting to
will automatically switch to Guidance View. You
can turn this feature off by selecting “Automatic  Ask Me So I Can Choose
show the remaining time left to travel in the
arrival information panel during navigation. Map View Switching” in the settings. You can choose whether you would like the
Navigation system to allow you to pick the route
to the destination.
MULTIMEDIA 123
 Don’t Ask me  Safety Warnings: You can change settings for Points Of Interest
You can choose whether you would like the whether you want to be warned, never warned,
Navigation system to select the route to the or warned only if you are speeding. The following ABOUT POINTS OF INTEREST
destination. options are available: Points Of Interest (POI) are useful places on the
 Fastest Route  When speeding: This warning is given when map.
you exceed the speed limit by more than Here are some examples:
You can choose whether you would like the
3 mph (5 km/h). When you are speeding,
Navigation system to choose the fastest route to  Restaurants
the speed panel also turns red in the Guid-
the destination.
ance View.  Hotels
 Shortest Route
 Driver Safety: Select this setting to make  Museums
You can choose whether you would like the some features locked while the vehicle is in  Parking lots
Navigation system to choose the shortest route motion.
by distance to the destination.  Gas stations
NOTE: 5
 Most Eco-Friendly Route  Emergency Services
This feature increases safety by minimizing driver
You can choose whether you would like the distraction. When driver safety is on, a message USING POIS TO PLAN A ROUTE
Navigation system to choose the route that will tells you when the lock is enabled.
consume the least amount of energy. When you plan a route, you can use a POI for the
 Avoid Interstate Highways SYSTEM destination or as a stop along the route.
You can choose whether you would like the Select this setting to reset all other settings. Using Search
Navigation system to avoid all highways while Selecting “Reset” will delete all saved places and 1. Select “Search” on the Main Menu to begin a
navigating to the destination. settings and restore the standard settings. This search. The search screen will open,
includes the language, voice settings, warning displaying the keyboard. Enter the name of
SOUNDS AND WARNINGS settings, and theme. your desired destination. Your search results
Select this setting to change the following sounds NOTE: will be displayed in two lists. Addresses and
and warnings: This is not a software update and will not affect the city matches are shown in the list called
version of the software application installed on “Addresses.” POIs, types of POIs, and Places
 Warning Type: You can choose the type of warn-
your Uconnect system. are shown in the list called “Points of
ings you want to hear when you are driving:
Interest.” You can also select a POI category
 Warning Sounds: Hear only warning sounds to only see POI search results from that
 None: No warning sounds are given category.
124 MULTIMEDIA
2. Select the desired POI. The location will appear  Recent Destinations: Select this button to select
on the map. From here, you can save the POI your destination from a list of locations you have
to “My Places,” use this POI as a starting point, recently navigated to.
begin navigation to this destination, or view
more details about this POI. By pressing “More USING MY PLACES
Information,” you can view the phone number You can use My Places as a way of navigating to a
and full address of the POI. place without having to enter the address. To
3. If a route is already planned, you can add the navigate to a saved destination in My Places,
location to your current route. To plan a route follow these steps:
to this destination, press the Drive button on 1. Press the touchscreen to bring up the main
the touchscreen. menu, and press “My Places”. Adding From My Places
NOTE: 2. Select the desired destination. The location 3. To select a location, do one of the following:
Your Navigation system will calculate a route, and will appear on the map with a pop-up menu.
 Zoom in on the map at the location you want
guidance to your destination will begin. Guidance 3. Press the Drive button to begin navigation to to select. Press and hold to select the loca-
View will begin as soon as you start driving. this destination. tion, then press the Add Location symbol.
My Places  Search for a location using the search func-
NOTE:
tion. Select “Show on Map,” then press the
ABOUT MY PLACES Your Navigation system immediately starts guiding
Add Location symbol.
you to your destination with spoken instructions
My Places provides an easy way to select a and visual instructions on the touchscreen.
location without the need to enter the address or Adding A Location From The Map
search for the location. You can use My Places to ADDING A LOCATION TO MY PLACES 1. In Map View, move the map and zoom in until
create a collection of useful or favorite addresses. you can see the destination that you want to
Adding From My Places
The following items are always in My Places: navigate to.
1. In the Main menu, press “My Places”.
 Home: Your home location can be your home 2. Press and hold the point on the map to select
2. Press “Add”. that location.
address or somewhere you often visit. This
feature provides an easy way to navigate there. 3. Press the three vertical dots to the right of the
name to open the pop-up menu.
MULTIMEDIA 125
4. Press “Add To My Places”. 6. The name of the location will appear in the edit Deleting A Location From My Places
screen. You can edit the name of the location 1. In the main menu, select “My Places”.
for easy recognition.
2. Press “Edit List”.
7. Press “Done” to save your location in the My
Places list. 3. Select the destination(s) you want to delete.
4. Press the Delete button.
Setting Your Home Location
1. In the Main Menu, press “My Places”. Getting Help
2. Press “Home”. Press the Help button in the Main menu or from the
Settings menu to see the following information:
3. To select a location for home, do one of the
following: About: Press the button to view information
Adding A Location To My Places  Zoom in on the map at the location you want about your Uconnect system. This information
to select. Press and hold to select the loca- includes: 5
5. The name of the location will appear in the edit
screen. You can edit the name of the location tion, then press the home icon next to  Serial number
for easy recognition. the name of the location.  Application version
6. Press “Done” to save your location in the My  You can also search for a location using the  Installed maps
Places list. search function. Select “Set Home Loca-  Legal information, such as Copyright and
tion.” Licenses for EULA and Open Source
Adding A Location Using Search
1. In the Main Menu, press “Search”. DELETING A LOCATION FROM MY PLACES Important Safety Notices And Warnings
2. Enter the name or address of a location using Deleting A Recent Destination From My Places GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM
the touchscreen keyboard. 1. In the main menu, select “My Places”.
The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a
3. Select the desired location, and then press 2. Press “Recent Destinations”. satellite-based system that provides location and
“Show In Map”. 3. Press “Edit List”. timing information around the globe. GPS is
4. The Map View will show the location. Press the operated and controlled under the sole
4. Select the destination(s) you want to delete.
pop-up menu button. responsibility of the Government of the United
5. Press the Delete button. States of America, which is responsible for its
5. Press “Add to My Places”.
availability and accuracy. Any changes in GPS
126 MULTIMEDIA
availability and accuracy, or in environmental

conditions, may impact the operation of this
© 2021 TomTom®. All rights reserved. This
material is proprietary and the subject of copyright
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
Navigation system. TomTom® does not accept any protection and/or database rights protection and/ IF EQUIPPED
liability for the availability and accuracy of GPS. or other intellectual property rights owned by
TomTom® or its suppliers. The use of this material The remote sound system controls are located on
USE WITH CARE is subject to the terms of a license agreement. Any the back surface of the steering wheel. Reach
unauthorized copying or disclosure of this material behind the wheel to access the switches.
Use of TomTom® navigation while driving still
means that you need to drive with due care and will lead to criminal and civil liabilities.
attention. Data Source © 2021 TomTom® All rights reserved.
SAFETY SETTINGS The software included in this product contains
copyrighted software that is licensed under the
We recommend using the safety settings to make GPL. A copy of that license can be viewed in the
your driving as safe as possible. These are some of License section. You can obtain the complete
the options included in the safety settings: corresponding source code from us for a period of
 Show safety reminders three years after our last shipment of this product.
 Warn when driving faster than allowed For more information, visit https://
www.tomtom.com/en_gb/opensource or contact
You can also drive more safely by using voice your local TomTom® customer support team via Remote Sound System Controls
commands to control navigation Ú page 121. us.support.tomtom.com/app/answers/list. Upon
Copyright Notices request, we will send you a CD with the The right-hand control is a rocker type switch with
corresponding source code. a push button in the center. Pushing the top of the
© 2021 TomTom®. All rights reserved. TomTom® switch will increase the volume, and pushing the
and the "two hands" logo are registered Linotype, Frutiger and Univers are trademarks of bottom of the switch will decrease the volume.
trademarks of TomTom® N.V. or one of its Linotype GmbH registered in the US Patent and
subsidiaries. Please see www.tomtom.com/ Trademark Office and may be registered in certain The push button located in the center of the
en_us/legal/ for warranties and end user license other jurisdictions. MHei is a trademark of The right-hand control to select the source (AM, FM,
agreements applying to this product. Monotype Corporation and may be registered in SiriusXM®, or USB)
certain jurisdictions. The left-hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push button in the center. The function of the left
hand control is different depending on which mode
you are in.
MULTIMEDIA 127
The following describes the left-hand control Activating Ram Telematics In Your Vehicles RAM T ELEMATICS GENERAL
operation in each mode. Before you get started you will need: I NFORMATION
RADIO OPERATION  The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) of each
Modification Statement
vehicle you want to activate.
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the Magneti Marelli has not approved any changes or
next available station and pushing the bottom of  Your main user’s log-in and password; new
modifications to this device by the user. Any
the switch will “Seek” down for the next available customers will be asked to register.
changes or modifications could void the user’s
station.  If you are a new customer, you will need authority to operate the equipment.
The button located in the center of the left-hand company credit card information or invoice
Magneti Marelli n'approuve aucune modification
control will tune to the next preset station that you number as further proof of customer identifica-
apportée à l'appareil par l'utilisateur, quelle qu'en
have programmed in the radio preset button. tion. Don’t worry, you will not be charged.
soit la nature. Tout changement ou modification
 Go to activate.verizonconnect.com/ram/#login. peuvent annuler le droit d'utilisation de l'appareil
MEDIA M ODE If you are an existing Verizon Connect customer, par l'utilisateur. 5
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next enter your company’s log-in credentials. New
Interference Statement
track on the selected media (USB/Bluetooth®). customers will need to register to create a new
Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the account. This device complies with Part 15, 22, 24, and
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning 27 of the FCC and Industry Canada licence-exempt
 Manually enter the VIN(s) or upload a CSV file
of the previous track if it is within eight seconds RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
with your VINs. A vehicle name is optional and
after the current track begins to play. following two conditions:(1) This device may not
can be added later. Follow online instructions to
cause interference, and(2) This device must
complete your vehicle entry.
RAM TELEMATICS - IF EQUIPPED  Create a password and enter billing information.
accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Ram Telematics is designed to help improve An email will be sent to you to complete the final
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
safety, efficiency, and productivity. It gives you step. After that, you will be ready to log-in and
d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio
complete visibility of your fleet options, whether access Verizon Connect Fleet!
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
from behind a desk or on a mobile device while you  You are good to go! You will receive an email aux deux conditions suivantes:(1) l'appareil ne doit
are on the go. You can log-in to view near real-time confirming your vehicles are now online. pas produire de brouillage, et(2) l'utilisateur de
and historical activity, including location, vehicle l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
For more information, or to learn more, visit
health, and driver performance. radioélectrique subi, même si le broulliage est
www.verizonconnect.com/ram/.
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
128 MULTIMEDIA
RF Exposure REGULATORY AND SAFETY The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation I NFORMATION level of energy emitted is far less than the
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. The antenna should be installed and US/CANADA electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
operated with minimum distance of 20 cm devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
between the radiator and your body. of wireless radios may be restricted in some
The radiated output power of the internal wireless situations or environments, such as aboard
Cet appareil est conforme aux limites d'exposition radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
aux rayonnements de la IC pour environnement exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
non contrôlé. L'antenne doit être installé de façon will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in on the wireless radio Ú page 236.
à garder une distance minmale de 20 centimètres (20 cm) or further from the human body.
entre la source de rayonnements et votre corps.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES standards and recommendations, which reflect
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being the consensus of the scientific community.
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
129
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES WARNING! WARNING!
FOUR-W HEEL ANTI-L OCK BRAKE  The ABS contains sophisticated electronic  The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer- those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
SYSTEM (ABS) ence caused by improperly installed or high following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
The ABS is designed to aid the driver in output radio transmitting equipment. This planing.
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking interference can cause possible loss of
 The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
conditions. The system operates with a separate anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
must never be exploited in a reckless or
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to such equipment should be performed by qual-
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
prevent wheel lock-up and to help avoid skidding ified professionals.
user’s safety or the safety of others.
on slippery surfaces.  Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
The system's pump motor runs during an ABS stop their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
to provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
When you are in a severe braking condition 6
involving the use of the ABS, you will experience
motor makes a low humming noise during Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop.
operation, which is normal. need to slow down or stop. This is the result of the system reverting to the
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light.  The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of base brake system.
When the light is illuminated, the ABS is not physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
functioning. The system reverts to standard increase braking or steering efficiency beyond pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking
non-Anti-Lock Brakes. Turning the ignition OFF and that afforded by the condition of the vehicle noise. These occurrences are normal and indicate
ON again may reset the ABS if the fault detected brakes and tires or the traction afforded. that the system is functioning properly.
was only momentary.
(Continued)
130 SAFETY
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC) WARNING!

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
SYSTEM The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced the natural laws of physics from acting on the path does not match the intended path, ESC
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system that vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
includes the Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
Control System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), prevent collisions, including those resulting from condition.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Electronic Roll excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
Mitigation (ERM) and Trailer Sway Control (TSC). All surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a WARNING!
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in  Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
and control in various driving conditions and are a reckless or dangerous manner, which could prevent the natural laws of physics from
commonly referred to as ESC. jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
others. traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
Brake Assist System (BAS)
tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
capability during emergency braking maneuvers.
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
The system detects an emergency braking ESC enhances directional control and stability of
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to
application and then applies optimum pressure to corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by
inappropriate driver input for the conditions.
the brakes. This can help reduce braking applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock counteract the above conditions. Engine power
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To the desired path.
reckless or dangerous manner which could
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply  Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
continuous braking pressure during the stopping than appropriate for the steering wheel position. others.
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no  Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less (Continued)
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
the BAS is deactivated.
SAFETY 131
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
WARNING! soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
 Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly and corrected. brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen
maintain your vehicle, may change the The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light the chance that wheel lift will occur.
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
may negatively affect the performance of the soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system occurring during severe or evasive driving
ESC system. Changes to the steering system, becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to
suspension, braking system, tire type and size Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor- the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. WARNING!
vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte- Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
prevailing road conditions.
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of conditions and driving conditions, influence the
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in a cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
injury and death. 6
reduced mode. especially those that involve leaving the roadway
NOTE: or striking objects or other vehicles. The
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
 The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
momentarily each time the ignition switch
Light in the instrument cluster will come or the safety of others.
placed in the ON position.
on when the ignition switch is turned to
 Each time the ignition is placed in the ON posi-
the MAR (ON/RUN) position for four Hill Start Assist (HSA)
tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was
seconds. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
turned off previously. HSA is designed to assist the driver when starting
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
engine running, a malfunction has been detected
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by short period of time after the driver takes their foot
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and off of the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply
driven several miles (km) at speeds greater than the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines the throttle during this short period of time, the
that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle system will release brake pressure and the vehicle
132 SAFETY
will roll down the hill. The system will release brake Traction Control System (TCS) When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
applied as the vehicle starts to move in the power may be reduced and you may feel the
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
intended direction of travel. brakes being applied to individual wheels to
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
HSA ACTIVATION CRITERIA engine power is reduced to provide enhanced
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA Off” mode.
system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD) functions
to activate: similarly to a limited slip differential and controls
WARNING!
 The vehicle must be stopped. the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on
 The vehicle must be on a 5% (approximate)
a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
grade or greater hill. system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
This will allow more engine torque to be applied to adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
 Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off”
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear). mode Ú page 130. AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
when the activation criteria have been met. The
system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an (TPMS)
NEUTRAL or PARK. excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
WARNING! The system may reduce engine power and apply warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
There may be situations on minor hills with a the sway of the trailer. The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when
NOTE: about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
the system will not activate and slight rolling may
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always means that when the outside temperature
occur. This could cause a collision with another
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
trailer tongue weight recommendations pressure should always be set based on cold
responsible for braking the vehicle.
Ú page 69. inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
SAFETY 133
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum above the recommended cold placard pressure in
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off. CAUTION!
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle For example, your vehicle may have a  Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
is driven — this is normal and there should be no recommended cold (parked for more than three Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
adjustment for this increased pressure. hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the sensor to become inoperable. After using an
See Ú page 209 on how to properly inflate the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
vehicle’s tires. measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a that you take your vehicle to an authorized
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the dealership to have your sensor function
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). checked.
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn
warning limit for any reason, including low  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle
temperature effects and natural pressure loss always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
may cause the tire pressure to rise to
through the tire. prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPMS
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and sensor.
TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the
are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
NOTE:
6
placard pressure value.
low tire pressure warning (TPMS Warning Light)  The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to CAUTION! care and maintenance or to provide warning of
the recommended cold placard pressure in order a tire failure or condition.
for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system  The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures  The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
will automatically update and the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off once the system receives the and warning have been established for the tire gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable  Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph system operation or sensor damage may causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this result when using replacement equipment failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
information. that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
NOTE: damage.
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) (Continued)
134 SAFETY
 The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility Pressure Warnings next to facilities emitting the same radio
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu- frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
rate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will illuminate in the instrument cluster, an audible 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window
has not reached the level to trigger illumination tinting that affects radio wave signals.
of the TPMS Warning Light. chime will be activated, and the “Check tire
pressure” text message will display when one or 3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
 Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire more of the four active road tire pressures are low. housings.
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
tire pressure in the tire Ú page 236. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
Base System on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure sensors.
This is the TPMS Warning Light located in
value. The system will automatically update and
the instrument cluster. NOTE:
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Your vehicle can be equipped with either a Tire
will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim Service Kit, a compact spare tire or a regular size
have been received. The vehicle may need to be
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire spare tire (with or without original TPMS sensor).
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel (24 km/h) to receive this information. 1. Tire Service Kit (original tire sealant – if
as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure equipped): After fixing the punctured tire with
readings to the receiver module.
Check TPMS Warnings original tire sealant, the original situation will
The TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 be restored, so system will turn off the telltale
NOTE:
seconds and remain on solid when a system fault during the normal drive.
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
is detected, an audible chime will be activated and 2. Compact Spare Tire – if equipped: The
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
a proper text message will be displayed. If the compact spare wheel is not equipped with a
and to maintain the proper pressure.
ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat TPMS sensor. So when mounted, during the
The TPMS consists of the following components: providing the system fault still exists. The TPMS normal drive the system will turn on the telltale
 Receiver module Warning Light will turn off when the fault condition (flashing for approximately 75 seconds then
 Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
no longer exists. A system fault can occur with any remains solid). This condition persists until a
of the following scenarios: wheel equipped with original TPMS sensor has
 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
been mounted on the vehicle.
SAFETY 135
3. Regular size spare tire (not equipped with

TPMS sensor): When mounted, during the
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
normal drive the system will turn on the telltale Some of the most important safety features in your front passenger seat, move the seat as far
(flashing for approximately 75 seconds then vehicle are the restraint systems: back as possible and use the proper child
remains solid). This condition persists until a restraint Ú page 161.
wheel equipped with original TPMS sensor has
OCCUPANT R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
been mounted on the vehicle. Then the system  Seat Belt Systems behind them or under their arm.
will be restored and the telltale will turn off
 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags 5. You should read the instructions provided with
during the normal drive.
 Child Restraints your child restraint to make sure that you are
4. Regular size spare tire (equipped with TPMS using it properly.
sensor): When mounted, the telltale will turn Some of the safety features described in this
off during the normal drive. section may be standard equipment on some 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If shoulder belts properly.
5. In all the above cases, please check the
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer. 7. The driver and front passenger seats should
replacement tire inflation pressure before
be moved back as far as practical to allow the
driving your vehicle. I MPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
6. In case of tire replacement, if the vehicle is
front air bags room to inflate. 6
Please pay close attention to the information in 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
driven for short periods of time, then the this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system can take a while to be restored. vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
system properly, to keep you and your passengers occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
as safe as possible. into the space between occupants and the
NOTE:
For a correct Tire Pressure Monitoring System Here are some simple steps you can take to door and occupants could be injured.
behavior, please wait for about 20 minutes in minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag: 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
key-off during each tire substitution. 1. Children 12 years old and under should modified to accommodate a disabled person,
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a see Ú page 233 for customer service contact
vehicle with a rear seat. information.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
position Ú page 161.
136 SAFETY
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
WARNING! outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
(BeltAlert)
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
to a child 12 years or younger, including a sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
child in a rear-facing child restraint. Light will remain on until the seat belts are
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle the AVV/START or MAR/RUN position.
are buckled. The driver should instruct all
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a Initial Indication occupants to buckle their seat belts.
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch Change Of Status
is first in the AVV/START or MAR/RUN position, a
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
SEAT BELT S YSTEMS chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
a poor driver and could cause a collision that will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
AVV/START or MAR/RUN position the Seat Belt
includes you. This can happen far away from home Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
or on your own street. both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The active when the outboard front passenger seat is
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a active when an outboard front passenger seat is animal or other items are placed on the outboard
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when unoccupied. front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
times. speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
SAFETY 137
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or WARNING! WARNING!
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with  In a collision, you and your passengers can  Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is suffer much greater injuries if you are not your injuries in a collision much worse. You
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn properly buckled up. You can strike the inte- might suffer internal injuries, or you could
on and remain on until the driver and outboard rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
Lap/Shoulder Belts sure you and others in your vehicle are to keep your passengers safe, too.
buckled up properly.
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped  Two people should never be belted into a
with lap/shoulder belts.  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside single seat belt. People belted together can
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people crash into one another in a collision, hurting
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows riding in these areas are more likely to be seri- one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely ously injured or killed. belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
with you under normal conditions. However, in a matter what their size.
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
6
seat belts.
out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
 A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
WARNING! and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
including the driver, should always wear their
 Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
more severe injuries in a collision. The air but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
provided at their seating position to minimize
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you part of your seat belt as low as possible and
the risk of severe injury or death in the event
properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t keep it snug.
of a crash.
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even (Continued)
(Continued)
though you have air bags.
(Continued)
138 SAFETY
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as

WARNING! WARNING! necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
 A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-  A shoulder belt placed behind you will not your lap.
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. protect you from injury during a collision. You
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized and shoulder belt are meant to be used
dealer immediately and have it fixed. together.
 A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong  A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap collision and leave you with no protection.
portion could ride too high on your body, Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
you. ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
 A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
collision, or if you have questions regarding 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho- “click.”
Wear your seat belt snugly.
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
 A seat belt that is worn under your arm is facility for inspection.
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju- 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. and adjust the seat.
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
your strongest bones will take the force in a the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
collision. seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
(Continued) Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
SAFETY 139
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
lap/shoulder belt.
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding the anchor point.
under the seat belt in a collision. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded Adjustable Anchorage
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate. As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it position, and if you are taller than average, you will
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
no longer twisted. position. After you release the anchorage button,
6
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage locked in position.
Positioning The Lap Belt
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it upward or downward to position the seat belt away
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the button to release the anchorage, and move it up or
shoulder belt. down to the position that serves you best.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
Adjustable Anchorage
140 SAFETY
NOTE: Seat Belts And Pregnant Women from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is work for all size occupants, including those in child
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature restraints.
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted NOTE:
in the upward position without pushing or These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
squeezing the release button. To verify the belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
into position.
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
WARNING! pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make replaced immediately.
your injuries in a collision much worse. You Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
might suffer internal injuries, or you could Energy Management Feature
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of with an Energy Management feature that may help
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
an accident is reduced for the mother and the further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
to keep your passengers safe, too.
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
 Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
Position the lap belt snug and low below the assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. controlled manner.
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
shoulder belt. behind the back or under the arm. (ALR)
 Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce Seat Belt Pretensioner Vehicle Without Rear Seat
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. The seat belt in the passenger seating position is
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
 Always make all seat belt height adjustments with pretensioning devices that are designed to equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
when the vehicle is stationary. remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
collision. These devices may improve the restraint system Ú page 158.
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
SAFETY 141
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
each seating position. automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations — Vehicle  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
With Rear Seat front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Location — Vehicle If the passenger seating position is equipped with
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
Without Rear Seat an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
Vehicle With Rear Seat comfortably wrap around the occupant’s  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
6
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
restraint system. The figure below illustrates the completely in this case and then carefully pull out rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
locking feature for each seating position only the amount of webbing necessary to
Ú page 158. comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
142 SAFETY
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode Air Bag System Components
WARNING!
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
belt.  Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat  Air Bag Warning Light
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
belt or children who are using booster seats.  Steering Wheel and Column
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
The locked mode is only used to install
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt  Instrument Panel
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This that have a harness for restraining the child.  Knee Impact Bolsters
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Locking Mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS  Seat Belt Buckle Switch
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode (SRS)  Supplemental Side Air Bags
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and  Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Some of the safety features described in this
allow it to retract completely to disengage the  Front and Side Impact Sensors
section may be standard equipment on some
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If  Seat Belt Pretensioners
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
WARNING! The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
 The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the monitors the readiness of the electronic
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) interconnecting wiring associated with the parts of the air bag system whenever the
feature or any other seat belt function is not electrical Air Bag System Components. Your ignition switch is in the AVV/START or
working properly when checked according to vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
the procedures in the Service Manual. System Components: is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
 Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions. The ORC contains a backup power supply system
(Continued) that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
SAFETY 143
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the NOTE: The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
instrument panel for approximately four to eight If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine embossed on the air bag covers.
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is related gauges are not working, the Occupant
in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. After the Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If this condition the air bags may not be ready to
the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either dealer service the air bag system immediately.
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after WARNING!
initial startup. Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect light does not come on as a bulb check when the
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the an authorized dealer service the air bag system
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental 6
following occurs, have an authorized dealer immediately.
service the air bag system immediately. Driver Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
 The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on Front Air Bags
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The WARNING!
position.
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt  Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
 The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
four to eight-second interval. ment panel during front air bag deployment
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The could cause serious injury, including death. Air
 The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit- passenger front air bag is mounted in the bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-
tently or remains on while driving. instrument panel, above the glove compartment. ably extending your arms to reach the steering
wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
144 SAFETY
detects whether the driver or front passenger seat injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
WARNING! belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air including some that may produce substantial
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Bags. vehicle damage — for example, some pole
front air bag can cause death or serious injury collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
to a child 12 years or younger, including a WARNING! collisions.
child in a rear-facing child restraint.  No objects should be placed over or near the On the other hand, depending on the type and
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the air bag on the instrument panel or steering location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing wheel because any such objects could cause crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe that produce a severe initial deceleration.
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a enough to cause the air bag to inflate. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.  Do not put anything on or around the air bag deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
covers or attempt to open them manually. You by themselves are not good indicators of whether
may damage the air bags and you could be or not an air bag should have deployed.
Driver and Passenger Front Air Bag
Features injured because the air bags may no longer be Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
functional. The protective covers for the air collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage bag cushions are designed to open only when position, away from an inflating air bag.
driver and front passenger air bags. This system the air bags are inflating.
provides output appropriate to the severity and When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
type of collision as determined by the Occupant  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive more severe injuries in a collision. The air signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
information from the front impact sensors (if bags work with your seat belt to restrain you non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
equipped) or other system components. properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t bags.
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
though you have air bags. passenger side of the instrument panel separate
during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
A low energy output is used in less severe and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more Front Air Bag Operation their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
severe collisions. time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front the driver and front passenger.
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
SAFETY 145
Knee Impact Bolsters Supplemental Side Air Bags When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
of the driver and front passenger, and position the This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental the space between the occupant and the door. The
front occupants for improved interaction with the Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
front air bags.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) high force that it could injure occupants if they are
WARNING! are located in the outboard side of the front seats. not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
 Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
impact bolsters in any way. outboard side of the seats.
 Do not mount any accessories to the knee
WARNING!
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, Do not use accessory seat covers or place
citizen band radios, etc. objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
serious injury. 6
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides (SABICs)
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
working together with the seat belts, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
pretensioners, and front air bags. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to (SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
belts and body structure. or “AIRBAG.”
146 SAFETY
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side

WARNING! impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
 Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
other cargo up high enough to block the or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
above the side windows where the SABIC and collisions, including some collisions at certain
its deployment path are located should angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
remain free from any obstructions. the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
 In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
not install any accessory items in your vehicle collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) which could alter the roof. Do not add an after- Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
Label Location market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other roof racks that require permanent attach- than it takes to blink your eyes.
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the WARNING!
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and vehicle for any reason.
 Occupants, including children, who are up
body structure. against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side Side Impacts seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in including children, should never lean on or
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint sleep against the door, side windows, or area
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to Controller (ORC) determines whether the where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular in an infant or child restraint.
properly, or if items are positioned in the area impact event is appropriate, based on the severity (Continued)
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. the ORC in determining the appropriate response
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or to impact events. The system is calibrated to
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
side windows in certain side impact events. vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
SAFETY 147
NOTE: Air Bag System Components

WARNING! Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
NOTE:
 Seat belts (and child restraints where appro- trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
priate) are necessary for your protection in all Rollover Events the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
collisions. They also help keep you in position, Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the designed to activate in certain rollover events. The nents listed below:
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu- Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
pants must wear their seat belts properly and  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
sit upright with their backs against the seats. is appropriate, based on the severity and type of  Air Bag Warning Light
Children must be properly restrained in a child collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good  Steering Wheel and Column
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat
the size of the child.  Instrument Panel
belt pretensioners should have deployed.
 Knee Impact Bolsters
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
WARNING!
sensing system determines if a rollover event may  Seat Belt Buckle Switch
 Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean be in progress and whether deployment is 6
against the door or window. Sit upright in the  Supplemental Side Air Bags
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
center of the seat. rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is  Supplemental Knee Air Bags
 Being too close to the Side Air Bags during appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy  Front and Side Impact Sensors
deployment could cause you to be severely the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on  Seat Belt Pretensioners
injured or killed. both sides of the vehicle.
 Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain side windows in certain rollover or side impact
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags events.
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
148 SAFETY
If A Deployment Occurs settle on your clothing, follow the garment  Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.  Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment. Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have equipped)
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,  Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
NOTE:
the air bags will not be in place to protect you. power
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with  Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
WARNING!
the air bag system. long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes
If you do have a collision which deploys the air Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident
bags, any or all of the following may occur: cannot protect you in another collision. Have the Response System
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
 The air bag material may sometimes cause  Unlock the power door locks
belt retractor assemblies replaced by an autho-
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu- rized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occu- Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The pant Restraint Controller System serviced as of these other functions in response to the
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or well. Enhanced Accident Response System:
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
 Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent NOTE: Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
and normally heal quickly. However, if you  Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior  Cut off battery power to the:
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-  Engine
if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme- ment.
 Electric Motor (if equipped)
diately.
 After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
 Electric Power Steering
 As the air bags deflate, you may see some to an authorized dealer immediately.
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal  Brake booster
by-product of the process that generates the
Enhanced Accident Response System
 Electric park brake
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains  Automatic transmission gear selector
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, intact, depending on the nature of the event, the  Horn
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine  Front wiper
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response
 Headlamp washer pump
continues, see your doctor. If these particles System perform the following functions:
SAFETY 149
NOTE: Maintaining Your Air Bag System

After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to WARNING!
the STOP/OFF position and remove the key from WARNING!  Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally
 Modifications to any part of the air bag system
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the or may not function properly if modifications are
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
engine compartment and on the ground near the made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
could be injured if the air bag system is not
engine compartment and fuel tank before for any air bag system service. If your seat,
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
resetting the system and starting the engine. If including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle be serviced in any way (including removal or
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
accident, reset the system by following the take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
procedure described below. If you have any doubt, manufacturer approved seat accessories may
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
contact an authorized dealer. be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
aftermarket side steps or running boards.
Enhanced Accident Response System system for persons with disabilities, contact an
 It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air authorized dealer.
Reset Procedure bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response works on your vehicle that it has an air bag
6
System functions after an event, the ignition switch system.
must be changed from ignition AVV/START or (Continued)
MAR/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF. Carefully check
the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the
system and starting the engine. After a crash, if the
vehicle will not start after performing the reset
procedure, the vehicle must be towed to an
authorized dealer to be inspected and to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
150 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR) other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally WARNING!
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
investigation. a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting To read data recorded by an EDR, special to hold even an infant on your lap could become
a road obstacle, data that will assist in equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or so great that you could not hold the child, no
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle matter how strong you are. The child and others
The EDR is designed to record data related to manufacturer, other parties, such as law could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short enforcement, that have the special equipment, in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The can read the information if they have access to the the child’s size.
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data vehicle or the EDR.
as: There are different sizes and types of restraints for
CHILD R ESTRAINTS
 How various systems in your vehicle were oper- children from newborn size to the child almost
ating; Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
all times, including babies and children. Every the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
 Whether or not the driver and passenger safety state in the United States, and every Canadian have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
belts were buckled/fastened; province, requires that small children ride in and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
 How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, can be prosecuted for ignoring it. labels attached to the child restraint.
 How fast the vehicle was traveling. Children 12 years or younger should ride properly Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
This data can help provide a better understanding buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries crash statistics, children are safer when properly Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
occur. restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
SAFETY 151
NOTE:
 For additional information, refer to http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–327–4236
 Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Children who are two years old or younger and who Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Infants and Toddlers have not reached the height or weight limits of their Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
child restraint vehicle
Children who are at least two years old or who have Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Small Children outgrown the height or weight limit of their Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
rear-facing child restraint vehicle
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
Larger Children child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle 6
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
Children Too Large for Child Restraints outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster
vehicle
seat
Infant And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.
152 SAFETY
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while Children Too Large For Booster Seats
WARNING! the child’s back is against the seatback, they Children who are large enough to wear the
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in enough to bend over the front of the seat when
front air bag can cause death or serious injury the vehicle by the seat belt. their back is against the seatback, should use the
to a child 12 years or younger, including a seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
child in a rear-facing child restraint. WARNING! to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the  Improper installation can lead to failure of an seat belt alone:
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing infant or child restraint. It could come loose in 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle a collision. The child could be badly injured or back of the vehicle seat?
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a killed. Follow the child restraint manufac- 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. turer’s directions exactly when installing an the front of the vehicle seat – while the child is
infant or child restraint. still sitting all the way back?
Older Children And Child Restraints  After a child restraint is installed in the 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward shoulder between the neck and arm?
Children who are two years old or who have
or rearward because it can loosen the child 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
restraint attachments. Remove the child touching the child’s thighs and not the
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat stomach?
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
position. When the vehicle seat has been
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
children who are over two years old or who have trip?
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of  When your child restraint is not in use, secure If the answer to any of these questions was “no”,
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
weight or height allowed by the child seat. stop or accident, it could strike the occupants the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
All children whose weight or height is above the or seatbacks and cause serious personal or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a injury. the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
SAFETY 153
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result
in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Combined Weight of Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Anchors LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether
Restraint Seat Belt Only
Only + Top Tether Anchor Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs
X X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
6
Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs
X X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
154 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint LATCH Positions For Installing Child
(LATCH) Restraint System anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Restraints In This Vehicle — Vehicles
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
Equipped With Rear Seating
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower
LATCH Label anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information. Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations —
Vehicle With Rear Seat
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight
restraint?
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
SAFETY 155
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to
No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?
by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the
No
LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating positions? center seating position.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If
the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH
No anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center
anchorage?
position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an
outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the 6
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
Yes child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child
passenger seat?
restraint owner’s manual for more information.
The 2nd row head restraints can be removed in every seating
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes position if they interfere with the installation of the child restraint
Ú page 20.
156 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages — Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages — Center Seat LATCH
Vehicles Equipped With Rear Seating Vehicles Equipped With Rear Seating
WARNING!
The lower anchorages are round bars There are tether strap anchorages
that are found at the rear of the seat behind each rear seating position  Do not install a child restraint in the center
cushion where it meets the seatback, located on the back of the seat. position using the LATCH system. This position
below the anchorage symbols on the is not approved for installing child seats using
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the LATCH attachments. You must use the
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will seat belt and tether anchor to install a child
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap seat in the center seating position.
between the seatback and seat cushion.  Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. See
Ú page 157 for typical installation instruc-
tions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint

Tether Anchorage Locations manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be described here.
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
LATCH Anchorages to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
SAFETY 157
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the WARNING!
Restraint
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to  Improper installation of a child restraint to the
If the selected seating position has a Switchable the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly restraint. The child could be badly injured or
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
Ú page 158 to check what type of seat belt each
the belt path. It should not move more than turer’s directions exactly when installing an
seating position has.
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. infant or child restraint.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap of the child seat so that  Child restraint anchorages are designed to
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR withstand only those loads imposed by
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
(ALR) Seat Belt: correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
When using the LATCH attaching system to install circumstances are they to be used for adult
2. Place the child seat between the lower seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
anchorages for that seating position. If the items or equipment to the vehicle.
being used by other occupants or being used to
second row seat can be reclined, you may
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the 6
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
can be moved forward and rearward in the
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
rear-most position to make room for the child
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
to allow more room for the child seat.
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the through the child restraint belt path and then
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
selected seating position. children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect toys and that they should not play with them.
it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 160 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
158 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The The seat belts in the passenger seating positions Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Vehicle Seat Belt In Vehicles With Rear are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
Seating portion of the seat belt tight around the child
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
of a lap/shoulder belt. locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
WARNING! into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
 Improper installation or failure to properly a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of into the retractor Ú page 140.
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations — Vehicle
directions exactly when installing an infant or With Rear Seating
child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to Weight limit of the Child Restraint install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
attach a forward facing child restraint? recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
Yes restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also
passenger seat?
allows contact.
SAFETY 159
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
The 2nd row head restraints can be removed in every
seating position if they interfere with the installation of the
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
child restraint
Ú page 20.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
No
against the belt path of the child restraint? ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A 1. Place the child seat in the center of the 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor seating position. If the second row seat can part of the belt until you have pulled all the
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
(ALR): raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a allow the webbing to retract back into the
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured better fit. If the rear seat can be moved retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
of a lap/shoulder belt. wish to move it to its rear-most position to now in the Automatic Locking mode. 6
make room for the child seat. You may also 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
WARNING! move the front seat forward to allow more is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
 Improper installation or failure to properly room for the child seat. webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the step 5.
the restraint. The child could be badly injured retractor to pass it through the belt path of the 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
or killed. child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in tighten the lap portion around the child
the belt path. restraint while you push the child restraint
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
child restraint. hear a “click.” 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion the seating position has a top tether
tight against the child seat. anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See anchor. 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
Ú page 160 for directions to attach a tether by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
160 SAFETY
the belt path. It should not move more than anchorage for that seating position, move the
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. child restraint to another position in the WARNING!
vehicle if one is available.  An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check lead to increased head motion and possible
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
direct path for the strap between the anchor
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped position directly behind the child seat to
Tether Anchorage with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the secure a child restraint top tether strap.
head restraint, and where possible, route the  If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
WARNING! tether strap under the head restraint and seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
between the two posts. If not possible, lower into the opening between the seatbacks as
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car the head restraint and pass the tether strap
seat to any location in front of the car seat, you remove slack in the strap.
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
that seating position, located behind the top of in the diagram.
the vehicle seat. See Ú page 154 for the 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
location of approved tether anchorages in your the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you

plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the Tether Strap Mounting
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
SAFETY 161
Installing Child Restraints In Commercial Installing Child Restraints Using The Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Vehicles — Vehicles Not Equipped With Vehicle Seat Belt In Vehicles Without Rear Child Restraints (Commercial Vehicle)
Rear Seating Seating
This commercial vehicle is not designed for use as Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
a family vehicle and is not intended for carrying in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
children in the front passenger seat(s). Never of a lap/shoulder belt.
install rear-facing child restraints in this vehicle. If
you must carry a child in a forward-facing child WARNING!
restraint, the passenger seat should be moved to
 Improper installation or failure to properly
the full rearward position and the child must be in
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
a proper restraint system based on its age, size
and weight. Follow the instructions below to secure
or killed.
the child restraint using the seat belt and tether
anchorage.  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations For Front
directions exactly when installing an infant or Bucket Seats
WARNING! child restraint. 6
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Rear-facing infant restraints must never be Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
secured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a The seat belt in the passenger seating position is
passenger air bag. In a collision, a passenger air equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
bag may deploy causing severe injury or death to Retractor (ALR). This seat belt is designed to keep
infants riding in rear-facing infant restraints. the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the
child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a
locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched”
into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out
of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor Ú page 140.
162 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. It should not move more than
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor the belt path. 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
(ALR): 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
hear a “click.”
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat. Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
of a lap/shoulder belt.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
Tether Anchorage (Commercial Vehicle)
WARNING! part of the belt until you have pulled all the This vehicle is equipped with a tether strap
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, anchorage located behind the front passenger
 Improper installation or failure to properly
allow the webbing to retract back into the seatback, near the floor. When installing a
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear forward-facing child restraint, always secure the
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is top tether strap to the tether anchorage.
or killed.
now in the Automatic Locking mode. 1. Look behind the front passenger seat to find
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s the tether anchorage. You may need to move
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
directions exactly when installing an infant or the seat forward to provide better access to
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
child restraint. the tether anchorage.
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat
step 5. 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
1. Place the child seat in the center of the 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to direct path for the strap between the anchor
seating position. If the second row seat can tighten the lap portion around the child and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or restraint while you push the child restraint with adjustable head restraints, raise the head
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a rearward and downward into the vehicle seat. restraint, and where possible, route the tether
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved strap under the head restraint and between
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
wish to move it to its rear-most position to the seating position has a top tether
restraint and pass the tether strap around the
make room for the child seat. You may also anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
outboard side of the head restraint.
move the front seat forward to allow more anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 160 for directions to attach a tether 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
room for the child seat.
anchor. restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the in the diagram.
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
SAFETY 163
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to

the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
SAFETY TIPS TRANSPORTING P ETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
TRANSPORTING P ASSENGERS your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
AREA. panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
WARNING! equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked secured by seat belts.
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
SAFETY CHECKS Y OU S HOULD M AKE
I NSIDE THE VEHICLE
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
Tether Strap Installation area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli- Seat Belts
sion, people riding in these areas are more Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
likely to be seriously injured or killed. for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
WARNING! 6
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your must be replaced immediately. Do not
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead vehicle that is not equipped with seats and disassemble or modify the system.
to increased head motion and possible injury to seat belts. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
the child. Use only the anchorage position
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor
directly behind the child seat to secure a child
and using a seat belt properly. conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
restraint top tether strap.
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
164 SAFETY

WARNING! WARNING!
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or  ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
switch is first placed in the on ON/RUN position. If
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the
the light is either not on during starting, stays on,
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
or turns on while driving, have the system
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: check for interference. If your floor mat inter-
possible. After the bulb check, this light will
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the  ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
until the fault is removed. If the light comes on your floor mat upside down or turn your floor
trunk.
intermittently or remains on while driving, have an mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately secured using the floor mat fasteners on a  ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
Ú page 135. regular basis. the passenger’s side floor area.
Defroster  ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT  ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any into the driver’s side floor area when the
place the blower control on high speed. You should other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an vehicle is moving. Objects can become
be able to feel the air directed against the additional floor mat on top of an existing floor trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if mat. pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
your defroster is inoperable. control.
 ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
Floor Mat Safety Information vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot  NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
be properly attached and secured to your (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, change the position of the floor mat and may
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the only use a FCA approved floor mat for the cause interference with the accelerator,
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch specific make, model, and year of your brake, or clutch pedals.
pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely vehicle.
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot (Continued)
slip out of position and interfere with the (Continued)
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
SAFETY 165
Lights
WARNING! WARNING!
Have someone observe the operation of brake
 If the vehicle carpet has been removed and lights and exterior lights while you work the  If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to controls. Check turn signal and high beam gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are indicator lights on the instrument panel. windows are closed and the climate control
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
each pedal to check for interference with the Door Latches use the recirculation mode.
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
 If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
re-install the floor mats.
Fluid Leaks the engine running, adjust your heating or
 It is recommended to only use mild soap and Check area under the vehicle after overnight cooling controls to force outside air into the
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
always check your floor mat has been properly Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
installed and is secured to your vehicle using brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat. be located and corrected immediately. into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
EXHAUST GAS 6
PERIODIC S AFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
MAKE OUTSIDE T HE V EHICLE WARNING!
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
Tires Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or odorless. Breathing it can make you system and adjacent body areas for broken,
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. unconscious and can eventually poison you. To damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: Open seams or loose connections could permit
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
 Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
lug nut/bold torque for tightness. Check the tires compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
confined areas any longer than needed to
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. system each time the vehicle is raised for
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
(Continued)
166 SAFETY
CARBON M ONOXIDE W ARNINGS

WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
carbon monoxide poisoning:
 Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
a parked vehicle with the engine running for
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
an open area with the engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the
vehicle.
 Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
167
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will WARNING!
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on continue to operate even though the ignition is  The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
the instrument panel below the radio screen. placed in the OFF position. changing tires only. The jack should not be
NOTE: used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
may wear down your battery. surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING PREPARATIONS FOR J ACKING

WARNING! 1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible.
 Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of Avoid icy or slippery areas.
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of WARNING!
Hazard Warning Flashers Button being hit when operating the jack or changing 7
the wheel. Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
Flashers. When the button is activated, all  Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. enough off the road to avoid being hit when
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on operating the jack or changing the wheel.
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Flashers.
it to a service center where it can be raised on 3. Apply the parking brake.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
a lift. 4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a  Never start or run the engine while the vehicle 5. Turn the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
safety hazard for other motorists. is on a jack. position.
(Continued)
168 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel J ACK L OCATION — I F EQUIPPED REMOVING THE S PARE TIRE —
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the right driver’s wheel is being The jack bag is placed on the front passenger floor IF E QUIPPED
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel. or in the rear cargo area depending on the trim 1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to
level. jack up the vehicle. Attach the wrench handle
to the winch extension.
Wheel Blocked
Jack/Tools Location
NOTE:
Jack Tools
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being lifted or raised. 1 — Wrench Handle
2 — Winch Extension
3 — Emergency Screwdriver
4 — Bolt Install Wrench
5 — Wheel Chock
6 — Jack
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 169
2. To access the winch mechanism open the rear NOTE:

doors of the vehicle to expose the winch The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
mechanism access hole. Install the winch winch extension only. Use of an air wrench or other
extension into the winch mechanism. power tools is not recommended and can damage
the winch.
4. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to
gain access to the spare tire retainer.
Winch Location
3. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counter-
clockwise until the spare tire is on the ground
with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it
Winch Location out from under the vehicle.
Spare Tire 7
Jack Tools Lowering The Spare Tire
1 — Wrench Handle
2 — Winch Extension
5. Remove the wing nut prior to removing the 7. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
retainer from the wheel. WARNING!
 Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
 Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
 Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
 Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
Retainer
raised on a lift.
Wing Nut
6. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
J ACKING INSTRUCTIONS  Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable. WARNING!  If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to careful of motor traffic.
help prevent personal injury or damage to your  To ensure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
vehicle: securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
 Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the valve stem facing the ground.
the edge of the roadway as possible before  The stowed spare tire should always be
raising the vehicle. checked for security by pushing on it with your
 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
hand, at the location under the rear fascia/
bumper, behind the vehicle. The spare tire
 Apply the parking brake firmly and set an auto- should not move when fully secured by the
matic transmission in PARK; a manual trans- winch under the vehicle.
mission in REVERSE.
Lifting Spare Tire
(Continued)
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug

bolts with the wrench handle by turning them
to the left one turn while the wheel is still on
the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on
each side of the vehicle body.
NOTE:
Place the jack underneath the jack engagement
location that is closest to the flat tire.
Jack Warning Label Front Jacking Location
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
Front Lifting Point
Rear Lifting Point
Jacking Locations
3. Turn the handle on the jack screw to the right

until the jack head is properly engaged in the
described location. Do not raise the vehicle
until you are sure the jack is securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to
the right until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the
spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum
stability.
Rear Jacking Location WARNING! Mounting Spare Tire

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
WARNING! make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on only enough to remove the tire.
you. You could be crushed. Never get any part of
your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you 5. Remove the wheel lug bolts. For vehicles with
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a wheel covers, remove the cover from the
service center where it can be raised on a lift. wheel by hand. Do not pry the wheel cover off.
Then pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Install the spare tire. Lightly tighten the wheel
CAUTION! lug bolts using the bolt install wrench. Installing Spare Tire
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the WARNING! CAUTION!
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
warning may result in serious injury.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to VEHICLES W ITH A LLOY WHEELS 2. The plastic fin must be directed downwards
the left Ú page 227. and perfectly coincide with the flange cut part;
For stowing a damaged tire on vehicles with alloy fit the bracket in the adapter, fold the bracket
8. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
wheels, remove the adapter bracket and bolts up and secure it to the adapter with the
from the storage bag in the glove compartment fastening knob.
WARNING!
and follow the steps below:
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision 1. Take the adapter and fit the plastic spacer
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of between the spring and the flange of the
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the bracket (The adapter bracket is sold
spare tire in the places provided. Have the separately through the dealer).
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
9. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before

driving the vehicle Ú page 173.
10. Stow the jack and tools under the driver’s seat.
Adapter/Bracket
11. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as
possible. Correct the tire pressure, as 1 — Adapter 7
required. 2 — Fastening Knob
12. When you place the spare tire back on the
winch or if you carry the tire in need of repair Adapter/Spacer
on the winch, always check that the tire is
properly secured under the vehicle by pushing 1 — Adapter
on the stowed tire under the rear fascia/ 2 — Plastic Spacer
bumper at the back of the vehicle. If the tire
has motion when pushed, use the tools to
re-tighten the winch until a loud click is heard.
3. Position the tire vertically and lay the mounted VEHICLES E QUIPPED WITH WHEEL 3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with
adapter on the inner part of the rim, using the the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover
supplied bolts fasten the wheel to the adapter COVERS by hand, snapping the cover over the two
using the bolt install wrench. 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. wheel bolts. Do not use a hammer or excessive
force to install the cover.
2. To ease the installation process for steel
wheels with wheel covers, install two wheel 4. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the
bolts on the wheel. Install the wheel bolts with threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the
the threaded end of the bolt toward the wheel. wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
Alloy Wheel Mounting
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the
4. Tighten the bolts with the wrench handle. jack handle counterclockwise.
5. Rotate the winch mechanism clockwise until 6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down
the wheel is properly stowed under the vehicle on the wrench while holding at the end of the
and until the wench makes three audible handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
noises. Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
wheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheel
6. Reach underneath and shake tire by hand to 1 — Valve Stem bolt has been tightened twice Ú page 227.
confirm that it is secure. The tire should not 2 — Valve Notch 7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt
move. If the tire is still loose and/or three 3 — Road Tire torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all
audible noises are not heard, place and secure 4 — Wheel Cover wheel bolts are properly seated against the
damaged wheel into the vehicle and seek wheel.
5 — Wheel Lug Nut
dealer assistance for the winch mechanism.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED TIRE SERVICE KIT U SAGE 1 — Power Button
Small punctures up to ¼ inch (6 mm) in the tire If a tire is punctured, you can make a first 2 — Pressure Gauge
tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign emergency repair using the Tire Service Kit located 3 — Sealant Bottle
objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be under the passenger seat. 4 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used Tire punctures of up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) can be 5 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
in outside temperatures down to approximately repaired; the kit can be used in all weather
-4°F (-20°C). conditions. Do not remove the foreign object from
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing the punctured tire, i.e., screw or nail. WARNING!
you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take  Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). it out from the bag and place it near the punctured vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off
tire. Screw the clear flexible filling tube to the tire the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
TIRE SERVICE KIT S TORAGE valve. using the Tire Service Kit.
The Tire Service Kit is located under the passenger
 Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
seat.
under the following circumstances:
 If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi-
mately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
7
 If the tire has any sidewall damage.
 If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
 If the tire has any damage from driving on
a flat tire.
Tire Service Kit Components
 If the wheel has any damage.
Tire Service Kit Location  If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
(Continued)
Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet

WARNING! socket. Start the vehicle engine. WARNING!
 Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames Push the Tire Service Kit power button on. The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
or heat source. electric compressor will be turned on, sealant and repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
air will inflate the tire. replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not
 A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is
collision or hard stop could endanger the Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be
repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire reached within 20 minutes. If the pressure has not
warning can result in injuries that are serious or
Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to been reached, turn off and remove the Tire Service
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around
follow these warnings can result in injuries Kit, drive the vehicle 30 feet (10 meters) back and
you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible
that are serious or fatal to you, your passen- forth, to better distribute the sealant inside the
at an authorized dealer.
gers, and others around you. tire.
 Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, compressor directly to the tire valve and repeat the
repeat the inflation process to reach the correct
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful inflation process.
tire pressure and continue driving.
if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the When the correct pressure has been reached, start
skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irrita- Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place
driving the vehicle to uniformly distribute the
tion. Flush immediately with plenty of water if it on the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that
sealant inside the tire. After 10 minutes, stop and
there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change a tire has been treated with Tire Service Kit.
check the tire pressure. If the pressure is below
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the vehicle, as the tire
contact with clothing. WARNING!
is too damaged, contact the nearest authorized
 Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains dealer. The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal- NOTE:
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of Replace the sealant canister prior to the expiration
water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce date at an authorized dealer.
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
Tire Service Kit Sealant Canister Positive (+) Battery Post Location
CAUTION!
NOTE:
WARNING! Do not use a portable battery booster pack or The positive battery post is covered with a
Store the sealant canister in its special any other booster source with a system voltage protective cap. Press on tabs, then lift up on the
compartment, away from sources of heat. greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, cap to gain access to the positive (+) battery post.
Failure to follow this WARNING may result in starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
sealant canister rupture and serious injury or occur.
death. 7
PREPARATIONS FOR J UMP STARTING
JUMP STARTING The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be the engine compartment, behind the left headlight
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a assembly.
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully. Positive Battery Post Protective Cap
See below steps to prepare for jump starting: 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
WARNING! cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and turn the  Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn battery.
ignition to STOP. your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
flames or sparks away from the battery. “ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
accessories.
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper J UMP S TARTING P ROCEDURE
must be away from the battery and the fuel
cables reach, apply the parking brake and injection system.
make sure the ignition is OFF. WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure WARNING!
WARNING! could result in personal injury or property Do not connect the jumper cable to the
damage due to battery explosion. negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and resulting electrical spark could cause the battery
personal injury could result. to explode and could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
WARNING! damage to the charging system of the booster booster battery, let the engine idle a few
vehicle or the discharged vehicle. minutes, and then start the engine in the
 Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start vehicle with the discharged battery.
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be Connecting The Jumper Cables 6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon-
injured by moving fan blades. 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper necting procedure.
 Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged
watch bands and bracelets that could make vehicle.
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
seriously injured. jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
(Continued) booster battery.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS WARNING!

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable from the engine ground of the vehicle If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
with the discharged battery. serviced by an authorized dealer. coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce If you see or hear steam coming from under the
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
the potential for overheating by taking the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
appropriate action. has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
booster battery.
system pressure cap when the radiator or
 On the highways — slow down.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper coolant bottle is hot.
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster  In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
battery. mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) engine idle speed while preventing vehicle CAUTION!
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the motion with the brakes.
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
vehicle with the discharged battery. NOTE: your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
There are steps that you can take to slow down an HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
If frequent jump starting is required to start your impending overheat condition: vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
vehicle you should have the battery and charging  If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
system inspected at an authorized dealer. A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
system and turning the A/C off can help remove 7
CAUTION! continuous chimes, turn the engine off
this heat. immediately and call for service.
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power  You can also turn the temperature control to
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). the blower control to high. This allows the heater
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life system.
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE 7. Once the key is removed, reinstall the steering
column cover.
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
PARK (P) before the ignition switch can be turned
CAUTION!
to the OFF/LOCK (key removal) position. It is advisable to contact an authorized dealer to
To remove the key manually, proceed as follows: have the reinstall procedure carried out. If you
would like to proceed in performing the reinstall
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
procedure special attention must be paid to the
2. Remove the Allen Key located in the rear cargo correct coupling of the clips. Otherwise damage
area, in the tool bag (if equipped) or on the left to the cover or noise might be heard due to
Lower Steering Column Screw Locations
side in the cargo box. incorrect fastening of the lower cover.
3. Unlock the steering column, pull the tilt/ 6. Pull the release tab downwards using one
telescoping control handle down. hand and with the other one remove the key,
4. Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in the
sliding it outwards. GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
end of the travel position, then lock the If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
steering column in position, push the control cannot be moved out of the PARK (P) position, you
handle up until fully engaged. can use the following procedure to temporarily
move the gear selector:
5. Using the Allen Key, undo the lower steering
column cover screws, and remove the lower 1. Turn the engine OFF.
cover. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
Release Tab Location

3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully NOTE:

separate the gear selector boot from the Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only
center console. be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
less. Whenever the transmission remains in
NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you must
press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or
REVERSE (R).
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
Gear Selector Override Access Hole lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in
6. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five
(N).
rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
Gear Selector Boot Location 7. Reinstall the gear selector boot. overheating and reduce the risk of transmission
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
pedal. FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE vehicle.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or a similar tool into If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or 7
the gear selector override access hole (at the snow, it can often be moved using a rocking NOTE:
right front corner of the gear selector motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
assembly), then push and hold the override clear the area around the front wheels. Push and Stability Control (ESC) system in Partial Off mode,
release lever down. While holding the override hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then before rocking the vehicle Ú page 130. Once the
release lever down, push the lock button on shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button
the gear selector and move the gear selector REVERSE (R), while gently pressing the again to restore ESC On mode.
to the NEUTRAL (N) position. accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator
pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
WARNING! TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, for instructions on shifting
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces This section describes procedures for towing a the transmission out of PARK (P) for towing
generated by excessive wheel speeds may disabled vehicle using a commercial towing Ú page 180.
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and service.
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. CAUTION!
Towing Wheel OFF The
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than ALL MODELS
Condition Ground  Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 sec- Vehicle damage may occur.
onds continuously without stopping when you Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning Front OK  When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
Wheel Lift Or
wheel, no matter what the speed. do not attach to front or rear suspension
Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED components. Damage to your vehicle may
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD result from improper towing.
CAUTION!
 When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or and other equipment designed for this purpose, NOTE:
drivetrain damage may result. following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar must be towed with the front wheels OFF the
 Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too or other towing device to main structural members ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift
fast may lead to transmission overheating and of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated equipment with the front wheels raised).
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) under tow must be observed. CAUTION!
while in gear (no transmission shifting occur-
If you must use the accessories (wipers, Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
ring).
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition requirements can cause severe transmission
must be in the ON/RUN mode. damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

(EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced record data that will assist in understanding how a
Accident Response System. vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
This feature is a communication network that or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 148. deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 150.
7
184
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
 Check engine oil level.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
change indicator system. The oil change indicator by someone other than an authorized dealer, to  Check windshield washer fluid level.
system will remind you that it is time to take your reset the message Ú page 42.  Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irreg-
NOTE:
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil ular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indi-
Under no circumstances should oil change
change indicator message will illuminate. This cator system turns on.
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
means that service is required for your vehicle. 350 hours of engine run time or 12 months,  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine and brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
trailer tow, extended engine idle time, extremely run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet  Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence customers.
when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 185
MAINTENANCE P LAN
Refer to the maintenance schedule for the required maintenance intervals. More frequent maintenance may be needed in severe conditions, such as dusty areas
and very short trip driving. In some extreme conditions, additional maintenance not specified in the maintenance schedule may be required.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

 Change oil and filter.
 Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
 Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
 Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses, lines and parking brake.
 Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
 Inspect exhaust system.
 Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
 Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary; replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty condi-
tions.
8
186 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and replace if
X X X X X X X
necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pulley, and replace if
X
necessary.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. 1 X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Change brake fluid every two years.2 X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.3 X

100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles

X X
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. Change engine air filter every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) if operated in dusty and off-road environment.
2. The brake fluid must be changed every 24 months. This interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
3. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
 You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. 8
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter Cover 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Oil Fill Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
CHECKING OIL L EVEL CAUTION! WARNING!

To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will Commercially available windshield washer
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel damage your engine. burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is working around the washer solution.
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine
is shut off. ADDING W ASHER FLUID
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground The windshield and rear window washers share the
MAINTENANCE-F REE BATTERY
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
There are four possible dipstick types: in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to battery. You will never have to add water, and
check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular periodic maintenance is not required.
 Crosshatched zone.
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
 Crosshatched zone marked SAFE. solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the WARNING!
 Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low system for a few seconds to flush out the residual
 Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the water.
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
range. When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
 Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
MIN and the MAX ends of the range. and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
NOTE: blade performance. on skin, flush the area immediately with large
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer amounts of water Ú page 177. 8
markings on the dipstick. system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture  Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at that meets or exceeds the temperature range of flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil your climate. This rating information can be found use a booster battery or any other booster
level to the high end of the range marking. on most washer fluid containers. source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each
other.
(Continued)
WARNING!
PRESSURE WASHING WARNING!
 Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso- Cleaning the engine compartment with a high You can be badly injured working on or around a
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash pressure washer is not recommended. motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
hands after handling. you have the knowledge and the proper equip-
CAUTION! ment. If you have any doubt about your ability to
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
CAUTION! parts and connections however, the pressures competent mechanic.
 It is essential when replacing the cables on
generated by these machines is such that com-
plete protection against water ingress cannot be
the battery that the positive cable is attached
guaranteed.
ENGINE OIL
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts Engine Oil Selection
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts An authorized dealer has the qualified service manufacturer only recommends engine oils that
and free of corrosion. personnel, special tools, and equipment to are API Certified and meet the requirements of the
perform all service operations in an expert manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395.
 If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
manner. Service Manuals are available which
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
include detailed service information for your American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
cables before connecting the charger to the Oil Identification Symbol
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
attempting any procedure yourself. This symbol means that the oil has been
starting voltage.
NOTE: certified by the API. The manufacturer
Intentional tampering with emissions control only recommends API Certified engine
systems may void your warranty and could result in oils.
civil penalties being assessed against you. This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
agency for advice on how and where used oil and Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
CAUTION! oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. The quality of replacement filters varies
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
ENGINE OIL FILTER
filters should be used.
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
Limited Warranty. filter at every engine oil change. AIR CONDITIONER M AINTENANCE
Engine Oil Filter Selection For best possible performance, your air conditioner
Synthetic Engine Oils A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used should be checked and serviced by an authorized
for replacement. The quality of replacement filters dealer at the start of each warm season. This
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® service should include cleaning of the condenser
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
certified filters should be used. fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
and the recommended maintenance intervals for
should also be checked at this time.
oil and filter changes are followed.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER F ILTER
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the WARNING!
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 185.
viscosity grade number should not be used.  Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
NOTE:
cants approved by FCA for your air condi-
Materials Added To Engine Oil Be sure to follow the Severe Duty Conditions main-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants
tenance interval if applicable Ú page 184.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against are flammable and can explode, injuring you.
the addition of any additives (other than leak WARNING! Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an can cause the system to fail, requiring costly
engineered product and its performance may be The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, 8
impaired by supplemental additives. etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the for further warranty information.
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless  The air conditioning system contains refrig-
Filters such removal is necessary for repair or erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the personal injury or damage to the system,
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
engine compartment before starting the vehicle adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, to be disconnected should be done by an
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in experienced technician.
problem to the environment. Contact an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental serious personal injury.
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the NOTE:

CAUTION! application of any lubricant, the parts concerned Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
Do not use chemical flushes in your air condi- should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; on geographical area and frequency of use. If chat-
tioning system as the chemicals can damage after lubricating excess oil and grease should be tering, marks, water lines or wet spots are present,
your air conditioning components. Such damage removed. Particular attention should also be given clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited War- to hood latching components to ensure proper Wiper Service Position
ranty. function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch, release mechanism and If it is necessary to lift the blade from the
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. windshield (In the event of snow or blade
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — replacement) proceed as directed:
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
R-1234yf twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. 1. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydroflu- Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, the OFF position.
oroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly 2. Turn the ignition to the MAR (ON/RUN) position
Environmental Protection Agency and is an into the lock cylinder. then to STOP.
ozone-friendly substance with a low
WINDSHIELD WIPER B LADES 3. After turning the ignition to the STOP, within
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
two minutes move the right stalk upward, into
recommends that air conditioning service be Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the the unstable (“anti-panic”) position, for at least
performed by an authorized dealer using recovery windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth half of a second. The windshield wiper then
and recycling equipment. and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove executes part of a stroke; at each command,
NOTE: accumulations of salt or road film. approximately 1/3 of a normal wiper stroke is
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long triggered.
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants. periods may cause deterioration of the wiper NOTE:
BODY L UBRICATION blades. Always use washer fluid when using the The previous operation can be repeated up to
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. three times in order to move the blades to the most
Locks and all body pivot points, including such Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice suitable position.
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of 4. Lift the blade from the windshield and proceed
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and contact with petroleum products such as engine with the required operation.
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with oil, gasoline, etc.
a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
5. Carefully lower the blade, bringing it back in

contact with the windshield. WARNING! CAUTION!
6. Bring the blade to the initial rest position,  Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain  Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
turning the ignition to MAR (ON/RUN). carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon- condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
NOTE: scious and can eventually poison you particularly involving engine misfire or other
Do not operate the wiper with the blades lifted Ú page 165. apparent loss of performance, have your
from the windshield. vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-
 A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
EXHAUST SYSTEM park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
could cause the converter to overheat,
rials might be grass or leaves coming into
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry resulting in possible damage to the converter
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained and vehicle.
or operate your vehicle in areas where your
engine exhaust system. exhaust system can contact anything that can
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust burn. Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected converter will not require maintenance. However, it
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized CAUTION! ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
technician inspect the complete exhaust system possible catalyst damage.
 The catalytic converter requires the use of
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will NOTE:
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an Intentional tampering with emissions control
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes emissions control device and may seriously systems can result in civil penalties being 8
to seep into the passenger compartment. In reduce engine performance and cause assessed against you.
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each serious damage to the engine. In unusual situations involving grossly
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor
change. Replace as required. (Continued)
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
damage: WARNING!
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
 Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-  When working near the radiator cooling fan, properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni- could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature coolant is needed to be added to the system
 Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
controlled and can start at any time the igni- please contact an authorized dealer.
towing the vehicle.
tion is in the ON mode.
 Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo- If the engine coolant is dirty or contains visible
nents disconnected or removed, such as when sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods Engine Coolant Checks flush with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032).
during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper- Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 185.
ating conditions. every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is Selection Of Coolant
COOLING SYSTEM dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and For further information Ú page 231.
refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology NOTE:
WARNING! (OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
 Mixing of engine coolant other than specified
 You or others can be badly burned by hot
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
OAT engine coolant, may result in engine
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
damage and may decrease corrosion protec-
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and should
under the hood, do not open the hood until the garden hose vertically down the face of the
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a condenser.
nology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally
cooling system pressure cap when the radi- Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine
ator or coolant bottle is hot. rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the coolant is introduced into the cooling system in
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and an emergency, the cooling system will need to
 Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
raised. The fan starts automatically and may
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. rized dealer as soon as possible.
start at any time, whether the engine is
running or not.
(Continued)
 Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine  We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/ damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
coolant products. Do not use additional rust Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain,
inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. MS.90032) as soon as possible.
and may plug the radiator.  Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine Cooling System Pressure Cap
 This vehicle has not been designed for use with coolant that meets the requirements of the
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
engine coolant, and to ensure that engine coolant
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery
recommended. (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
tank.
 Some vehicles require special tools to add −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
an authorized dealer for assistance. The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems is any accumulation of foreign material on the
properly could lead to severe internal engine  Use only high purity water such as distilled or
sealing surfaces.
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to deionized water when mixing the water/engine
the system please contact an authorized dealer. coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower The image on the coolant system
quality water will reduce the amount of corro- pressure cap is a reminder that the
Adding Coolant radiator contains hot engine coolant
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
Your vehicle is built with engine coolant (OAT under pressure.
coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows NOTE:
extended maintenance intervals. This engine  It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the WARNING!
coolant can be used up to 10 years or proper level of protection against freezing
 Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. according to the temperatures occurring in the 8
area where the vehicle is operated. add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
period, it is important that you use the same  Some vehicles require special tools to add remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems Heat causes pressure to build up in the
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle. properly could lead to severe internal engine cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
Please review these recommendations for using damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to do not remove the pressure cap while the
OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of the system, please contact a local authorized system is hot or under pressure.
the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. dealer.
 Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
When adding engine coolant:  Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
mended and can result in cooling system engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant Cooling System Notes  Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant is a regulated NOTE:
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-  Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
your local authorities to determine the disposal meters of operation, you may observe vapor vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion, do coming from the front of the engine compartment. the front of the condenser clean.
not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open This is normally a result of moisture from rain,  Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the snow, or high humidity accumulating on the Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
ground, clean up immediately. If ingested, seek radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
emergency assistance immediately. opens, allowing hot engine coolant to enter the Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
Coolant Level radiator. engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
If an examination of your engine compartment and increased emissions.
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
visual method for determining that the coolant
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
BRAKE SYSTEM
level is adequate. With the engine OFF and cold,
the level of the engine coolant in the bottle should dissipate. In order to ensure brake system performance, all
be between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.  Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. brake system components should be inspected
periodically. For the proper maintenance intervals
The radiator normally remains completely full, so  Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
Ú page 185.
there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant coolant needs to be added, the contents of the WARNING!
freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise an coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
authorized dealer of this. As long as the engine against freezing. Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
 If frequent engine coolant additions are
only needs to be checked once a month. or riding on the brake pedal can result in
required, the cooling system should be pressure
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
When additional engine coolant is needed to tested for leaks.
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that  Maintain engine coolant concentration at a would not have your full braking capacity in an
meets the requirements of the manufacturer minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to emergency.
Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro-
the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. sion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
Brake Master Cylinder life. Use only the manufacturer specified

WARNING! transmission fluid Ú page 232. It is important to
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked
 To avoid contamination from foreign matter or maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
when performing under hood services or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that using the recommended fluid.
immediately if the Brake Warning Light is
illuminated. has been in a tightly closed container. Keep NOTE:
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area all times. Brake fluid in an open container
before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
bring the fluid level up to the requirements lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil CAUTION!
described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This
brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be facturer recommended fluid may cause deterio-
could result in a collision.
checked when pads are replaced. However, low ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup  Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result converter shudder Ú page 232.
may be needed. Use only the manufacturer in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
recommended brake fluid Ú page 232. causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl Special Additives
WARNING! surfaces; care should be taken to avoid its It is strongly recommended against using any
contact with these surfaces. special additives in the transmission. Automatic
 Use only the manufacturer recommended Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product
brake fluid Ú page 232. Using the wrong type  Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contam-
and its performance may be impaired by
of brake fluid can severely damage your brake inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
could be damaged, causing partial or
supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any 8
system and/or impair its performance. The fluid additives to the transmission. Avoid using
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is complete brake failure. This could result in a transmission sealers as they may adversely affect
also identified on the original factory installed collision. seals.
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION!
Selection Of Lubricant Do not use chemical flushes in your transmis-

sion as the chemicals can damage your trans-
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid mission components. Such damage is not
to ensure optimum transmission performance and covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check UPFITTER CONNECTORS — IF EQUIPPED PIN Function

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not The preparation connectors are to be only used by 1 Not Connected
require adjustment under normal operating upfitters. This connector is located under the dash.
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not 2 Generator Voltage Sensor 2
required; therefore the transmission has no 3 Vehicle Speed Signal
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your 4 Not Connected
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission 5 Not Connected
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer 6 Not Connected
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
7 Courtesy Lamp Feed
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage. 8 Ambient Lighting Control
9 Not Connected
CAUTION!
10 Not Connected
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an Connector Location 11 Not Connected
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized 15 Way Vehicle Connector Functions and View 12 Not Connected
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid 13 Ignition Run/Start Output
level accurately.
14 Not Connected
15 Not Connected
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason. Connector Pin Numbers
PIN Function FUSES

A Power Supply General Information
B GND
WARNING!
 When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or
Upfitter Connector any other material. Do not place a fuse inside
a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to
This connector is supplied to the upfitter when the use proper fuses may result in serious
vehicle is ordered with the applicable package. personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
2 Way Vehicle Connector Functions and View
 Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
Upfitter Connector ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
This connector is supplied to the upfitter when the
vehicle is ordered with the applicable package.  If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!  If a general protection fuse for safety systems 8
The maximum current load allowed is 15 amps (air bag system, braking system), power unit
for continuous use. systems, (engine system, transmission
system) steering system or Body Control
Module (BCM) blows, contact an authorized
For additional questions about these connectors
dealer.
Connector Pins as well as general technical questions about
upfitting your Ram product, refer to https://
www.ramtrucks.com/ram-commercial/
body-builders-guide.html/ or call
1 (866)-205-4102.
Underhood Fuses
CAUTION!
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right
If it is necessary to wash the engine side of the engine compartment, next to the
compartment, take care not to directly hit the battery. To access the fuses, remove fasteners and
fuse box, and the windshield wiper motors with remove the cover.
water.
The fuses protect electrical systems against

excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the
Blade Fuses
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/
melt. 1 — Fuse Element
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for 2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
extended periods of time with the engine off may element
result in vehicle battery discharge. 3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse) Front Distribution Unit
The ID number of the electrical component
corresponding to each fuse can be found on the
back of the cover.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F01 60 Amp Blue – Body Controller
F02 40 Amp Orange – Rear Power Windows, Fog Lamps, Front Heated Seats *
F02 30 Amp Green – Rear Power Windows, Front Heated Seats Fog Lamps *
F02 20 Amp Yellow – Front Heated Seats *

* If Equipped
F03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp Orange – BSM System Module
F06 20 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan - Low Speed
F07 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan - High Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Blower Motor
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 – 10 Amp Red Secondary Loads ECM
F14 – 15 Amp Blue High Beam
F15 – – –
F16 – 5 Amp Tan ECM and Transmission Shifter
F17 – 25 Amp Clear ECM Power Loads
F18 – 5 Amp Tan ECM Load, Main Relay
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning
8
F20 – 30 Amp Green Rear Defroster *
F21 – 5 Amp Tan Key Unlock
F22 – 10 Amp Red Primary ECM Loads
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow BSM System
F24 – 5 Amp Tan BSM System, Positive Key and Steering Angle Sensor
F30 – 15 Amp Blue 2nd Instrument Panel Power Outlet (Battery)
F83 20 Amp Yellow – Fuel Pump

* If Equipped
F84 – 15 Amp Blue AT Module
F85 – 15 Amp Blue Rear Power Outlet 12 Volts (ACC/ON/RUN)
F86 – 15 Amp Blue IP Power Outlet 12 Volts (ACC/ON/RUN)
F87 – 5 Amp Tan IBS
F88 – 7.5 Amp Brown External Mirror Defrost *
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control
Module (BCM) and is located on the driver's side
under the instrument panel.
NOTE:
Please contact an authorized dealer for BCM fuse
replacement.
Fuse Panel Cover Fuse Panel Cavity Locations

Cavity Mini Fuse Description

F53 5 Amp Beige KL 30 (+30) - IPC, FTM
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Doors Locking
F36 15 Amp Blue KL 30 (+30) - TPMS, EOBD, HVAC, Radio, USB, SGW
F43 15 Amp Blue Bi-Directional Washer Pump
F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Windows
F50 7.5 Amp Brown KL 15 (+15) - Air-Bag
F51 7.5 Amp Brown KL 15 (+15) - External Mirror Adjustment Command, HVAC, RVC, HWB Coils
F37 5 Amp Beige KL 15 (+15) - Brake Pedal Switch (N.O.), IPC, Brake Pedal Switch (N.C.)
F49 5 Amp Beige KL 15 (+15) - PAM, CSS Lighting, TTM, SGW, and Heaters Light, ECM Backlighting
F31 5 Amp Beige KL 15a (INT A) - HWB, MCO
F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Windows
8
Central Unit Fuse Panel

The central power fuse panel is located on the driver’s side under the instrument panel.
Fuse Panel
Cavity Mini Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F1 10 Amp Red Front Heated Seat Passenger *
F2 10 Amp Red Front Heated Seat Driver *
F3 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Window Driver side *
F4 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Window Passenger side *
F5 15 Amp Blue Fog Lamps *
BULB R EPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Lamps C10W
Rear Courtesy Lamps C10W
Luggage Lamp C5W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Low Beam Headlamp H11
Front High Beam Headlamps HB3
Front Side Marker Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer) 8
Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps W21W
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Rear Stop Lamp P21W
Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W
Rear Tail Lamps P21/5W
Rear Side Marker Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized adealer)
Center Mount Brake Lamp W5W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Reverse Light W16W
Front Fog Lamps H11
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced visit an authorized dealer or refer to
the applicable Service Manual.
Replacing Exterior Bulbs FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMPS PARKING AND DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
See below steps to replace: See below steps to replace:
HEADLAMPS
1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer 1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer
See below steps to replace: upper headlamp housing. lower headlamp housing.
1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the 2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove. 2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove.
headlamp housing.
3. Install the bulb into socket. 3. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/
2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise. socket clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
4. Rotate the bulb/socket clockwise into the
3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed. lamp locking it in place. 4. Reinstall the plastic cap.
4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in 5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
place. FRONT/REAR SIDE MARKER LAMPS
5. Reinstall the plastic cap. The front/rear side marker lamps are LED and not
serviced separately. See an authorized dealer for
replacement of these lights.
REAR TAIL, STOP, BACKUP AND TURN SIGNAL 3. For versions with high roof and swing doors,
LAMPS remove the pressure-fit plastic guard and
rubber cap using a screwdriver, release the
The rear light cluster contains taillight, brake light,
retaining tags as shown in the figure and
direction indicator and reverse/rear fog light bulbs.
remove the unit.
To access the light clusters, see below steps to
replace: 4. Remove the appropriate tabs and remove the
bulb holder.
1. Open the rear doors.
5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace it.
2. Remove the screws and remove the tail lamp
assembly. LICENSE PLATE LIGHTS
3. Remove the screws and separate the Dome Lamp Assembly
See below steps to replace:
backplate from the lamp housing.
1. Disengage the holding tabs and remove the 2. Open protective cover.
4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by
lens by lifting to the left.
pushing them slightly and turning counter-
clockwise. 2. Remove the bulbs by releasing them from the
side contacts; insert the new bulbs and make
5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling
sure they are correctly clamped between these
straight out.
contacts.
6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
The bulbs are arranged inside the light cluster as 8
follows: DOME LAMP WITH SPOT LIGHTS
THIRD BRAKE LIGHT (CENTER MOUNT) See below steps to replace:
See below steps to replace: 1. Remove dome lamp by depressing the tabs, Dome Lamp
using a suitable tool.
1. For versions with tailgate, loosen the two 1 — Protective Cover
fastening screws and extract the cluster. 2 — Bulbs
2. For versions with swing doors, remove rubber
plugs, remove retaining tabs and extract the
cluster.
3. Replace the bulbs releasing them from the 2. Open the cover. 3. Replace the bulb releasing them from the side
side contacts making sure that the new bulbs contacts making sure that the new bulbs are
are correctly secured between the contacts. correctly secured between the contacts.
4. Close the protective cover and reposition it
back into its housing, making sure that it locks
into place.
REAR ROOF LAMP

See below steps to replace:
1. Remove roof lamp by pressing the tabs, using
a suitable tool.
Roof Lamp (Reverse Side)
1 — Cover Roof Lamp (Reverse Side)
1 — Bulb
4. Close the protective cover and reposition it

back into its housing, making sure that it locks
into place.
Roof Lamp
TIRES 1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)

 LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 2 — Size Designation LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
3 — Service Description except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the the sidewall preceding the size designation.
following information: Tire Markings, Tire 4 — Maximum Load Example: LT235/85R16.
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and 5 — Maximum Pressure  Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
6 — Treadwear, Traction and rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
Tire Markings Temperature Grades sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
NOTE:
 High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
 P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US standards and it begins with the tire diameter
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter molded into the sidewall.
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
 European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
Tire Markings "P" is absent from this tire size designation. 8
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
 Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
 "R" means radial construction, or
 "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
 A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
 A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
 The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
 XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
 LL = Light load tire or
 C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
8
 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 03 means the 3rd week
EXAMPLE:
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 01 means the year 2001
 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the
B-pillar
front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has
not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in
units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire
Maximum Inflation Pressure inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into
the sidewall.
The manufacturer recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading
Tire Placard capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire
inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about
the:
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on 1. Number of people that can be carried in the
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the vehicle.
driver's side door. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
and spare tires.
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar) Loading
Tire And Loading Information Placard The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information Placard
Ú page 68.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear 8
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading,
Tire And Loading Information Placard and trailer towing Ú page 68.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of (4) The resulting figure equals the Metric Example For Load Limit
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined available amount of cargo and luggage For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
weight of occupants and cargo should never
load capacity. For example, if “XXX” there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading the amount of available cargo and luggage load
Information placard. The combined weight of amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue be five 150 lb passengers in your
shown in step 4.
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the vehicle, the amount of available cargo
weight referenced here. and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. NOTE:
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
Steps For Determining Correct Load your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Limit— (5) Determine the combined weight of The following table shows examples on how to
(1) Locate the statement “The combined luggage and cargo being loaded on the calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
weight of occupants and cargo should vehicle. That weight may not safely capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
exceed the available cargo and luggage configurations and number and size of occu-
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
vehicle's placard. load capacity calculated in Step 4.
and may not be accurate for the seating and
(2) Determine the combined weight of (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load carry capacity of your vehicle.
the driver and passengers that will be load from your trailer will be transferred  For the following example, the combined weight
riding in your vehicle. to your vehicle. Consult this manual to of occupants and cargo should never exceed
determine how this reduces the 865 lb (392 kg).
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
available cargo and luggage load
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
capacity of your vehicle.
XXX lbs.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
TIRES — G ENERAL I NFORMATION WARNING!

Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
Tire Pressure  Unequal tire pressures can cause steering abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the problems. You could lose control of your resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. vehicle.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
 Unequal tire pressures from one side of the Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
pressure:
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
 Safety drift to the right or left. uncomfortable ride.
 Fuel Economy  Always drive with each tire inflated to the Tire Inflation Pressures
 Tread Wear recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the side door.
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
At least once a month:
WARNING! sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.  Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
 Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
can cause collisions.
NOTE:
make a visual judgment when determining
 Unequal tire pressures from side to side may proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
 Underinflation increases tire flexing and can cause erratic and unpredictable steering
result in overheating and tire failure. even when they are under inflated.
response.
 Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
 Over inflation reduces a tire's ability to  Unequal tire pressure from side to side may damage.
cushion shock. Objects on the road and cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
chuckholes can cause damage that result in CAUTION!
Fuel Economy
tire failure.
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
 Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
resulting in loss of vehicle control. valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
(Continued)
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Tire Repair
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure it meets the following criteria:
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle  The tire has not been driven on when flat.
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold  The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire  The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
sidewall. (6 mm).
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. and additional information.
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi WARNING!
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. High speed driving with your vehicle under immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure maximum load is dangerous. The added strain size and service description (Load Index and
inside a garage, especially in the Winter. on your tires could cause them to fail. You could Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle as well as it is not designed to be reused.
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a 8
Radial Ply Tires rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
condition.
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to WARNING! Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited driving
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
be too low. capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat
four. Never combine them with other types of tire is changed after driving with under inflated tire
tires.
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is Tread Wear Indicators

not designed to be reused when driven under Run WARNING!
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition. Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
tires to help you in determining when your tires
NOTE: should be replaced. six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
TPMS Sensor must be replaced after driving the Failure to follow this warning can result in
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the sudden tire failure. You could lose control and
vehicle on a flat tire condition. tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the have a collision resulting in serious injury or
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). death.
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the When the tread is worn to the tread wear
Run Flat mode. indicators, the tire should be replaced.
For more information Ú page 132. NOTE:
For further information Ú page 218.
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
Tire Spinning Life Of Tire installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying tires.
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph factors including, but not limited to: Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires
 Driving style.
continuously without stopping. from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
 Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
For further information Ú page 181. Replacement Tires
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
WARNING!
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in many characteristics. They should be inspected
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces the need for earlier tire replacement. regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
generated by excessive wheel speeds may  Distance driven. pressures. The manufacturer strongly
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your  Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
originals in size, quality and performance when
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
replacement is needed Ú page 218. Refer to the
for more than 30 seconds continuously when reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
Tire and Loading Information placard or the
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. recommended.
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index Summer Or Three Season Tires —
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 210. WARNING!
If Equipped
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or  Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can capacity, other than what was originally
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s smaller load index could result in tire over-
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
specifications match those of the original wheels. loading and failure. You could lose control and
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
have a collision.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
dealer or original equipment dealer with any  Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads
questions you may have on tire specifications or adequate speed capability can result in are covered with ice or snow. For more
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. information, contact an authorized dealer.
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and Summer tires do not contain the all season
ride of your vehicle. designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the
CAUTION! tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four;
WARNING! failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
 Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or size may result in false speedometer and handling of your vehicle.
speed rating other than that specified for your odometer readings.
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved WARNING!
tires and wheels may change suspension Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
dimensions and performance characteristics, TIRE TYPES
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in 8
All Season Tires — If Equipped severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre- conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
dictable handling and stress to steering and All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction vehicle control.
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in levels may vary between different all season tires.
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
your vehicle. season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
(Continued) your vehicle.
Snow Tires SPARE T IRES — IF E QUIPPED Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

Some areas of the country require the use of snow NOTE: The compact spare is for temporary emergency
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
of a spare tire Ú page 175.
sidewall. spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
If you need snow tires, select tires CAUTION! Information Placard located on the driver’s side
equivalent in size and type to the original door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
equipment tires. Use snow tires only in
not take your vehicle through an automatic car letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
sets of four; failure to do so may
wash with a compact or limited use temporary Example: T145/80D18 103M.
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
vehicle. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
result.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
should not be operated at sustained speeds over and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
designated for temporary emergency use
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph opportunity.
Ú page 72.
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
authorized tire dealer for recommended safe Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation And Wheel — If Equipped since the wheel is designed specifically for the
pressures. compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
While studded tires improve performance on ice, wheel equivalent in look and function to the compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces original equipment tire and wheel found on the given time.
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If
laws should be checked before using these tire your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
types. tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
WARNING! conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary since the wheel is designed specifically for the
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
emergency use only. With these spares, do not collapsible spare tire.
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
use spares have limited tread life. When the tread WARNING!
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
is worn to the tread wear indicators, the Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be emergency use only. With these spares, do not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire use spares have limited tread life. When the tread original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
failure and loss of vehicle control. is worn to the tread wear indicators, the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be at the first opportunity.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire WARNING!
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency
failure and loss of vehicle control.
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Full Size Spare — If Equipped vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
Information Placard located on the driver’s side more than the speed listed on the limited use
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
Collapsible spare tire description example: inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is 8
165/80-17 101P. Loading Information Placard located on the
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original When the tread is worn to the tread wear
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
equipment tire at the first opportunity and
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
opportunity. your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
result in loss of vehicle control.
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is at the first opportunity.
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before
lowering the vehicle.
WHEEL A ND W HEEL TRIM C ARE When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. CAUTION!
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
Wash wheels with the same soap solution wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
recommended for the body of the vehicle and or polishing compounds. They will permanently
aluminum or chrome wheels.
remember to always wash when the surfaces are damage this finish and such damage is not
not hot to the touch. covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These basis; this is all that is required to maintain this
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road products may damage the wheel's protective finish.
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is TIRE CHAINS AND TRACTION D EVICES
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s recommended. Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction
protective coating that helps keep them from
devices are not recommended.
corroding and tarnishing.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an CAUTION!
CAUTION!
extended period after cleaning the wheels with Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the are used.
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or brakes to remove the water droplets from the
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel brake components. This activity will remove the
cleaners and automatic car washes may red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such vibration when braking.
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® operate at different loads and perform different
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. steering, driving, and braking functions. For these
reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of

tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES characteristics and climate.
those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow The following tire grading categories TRACTION G RADES
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a were established by the National
smooth, quiet ride. Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The Traction grades, from highest to
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 185. The specific grade rating assigned by the lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should tire's manufacturer in each category is represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
be corrected prior to rotation being performed. shown on the sidewall of the tires on pavement, as measured under
The suggested rotation method is the “forward your vehicle. controlled conditions on specified
cross” shown in the following diagram. This government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
rotation pattern does not apply to some directional concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
tires that must not be reversed. to Federal safety requirements in
traction performance.
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire does not include acceleration, cornering,
when tested under controlled conditions hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. 8
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
TEMPERATURE G RADES
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded The Temperature grades are A (the
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross) 100. The relative performance of tires highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
depends upon the actual conditions of resistance to the generation of heat and
their use, however, and may depart its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
significantly from the norm due to under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause  Disconnect the negative cable from battery. What Causes Corrosion?
the material of the tire to degenerate  Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
and reduce tire life, and excessive service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
temperature can lead to sudden tire run the air conditioning system at idle for about The most common causes are:
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
failure. The grade C corresponds to a  Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
level of performance, which all cation to minimize the possibility of compressor  Stone and gravel impact
passenger vehicle tires must meet damage when the system is started again.  Insects, tree sap and tar
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A BODYWORK  Salt in the air near seacoast localities
represent higher levels of performance  Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants

on the laboratory test wheel, than the PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC BODY AND UNDERBODY M AINTENANCE
minimum required by law. AGENTS
Cleaning Headlights
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
WARNING! Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
The temperature grade for this tire is make roads passable in snow and ice and those and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
established for a tire that is properly inflated and that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during to stone breakage than glass headlights.
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
or excessive loading, either separately or in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
combination, can cause heat buildup and vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on be followed.
possible tire failure. which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
weather and other extreme conditions will have an and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
STORING THE VEHICLE protection. solution followed by rinsing.
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 3 The following maintenance recommendations will Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
weeks, we recommend that you take the following enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. clean the lenses.
battery:
PRESERVING T HE B ODYWORK Special Care INTERIORS

 If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
Washing SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
 Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your at least once a month.
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
 It is important that the drain holes in the lower and carpeting.
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
completely with water. NOTE:
kept clear and open.
 If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have Power washing is not allowed inside the vehicle
 If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the (both passenger and cargo area).
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
paint, touch them up immediately.
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
 If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or WARNING!
 Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec- Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
as possible. if used in closed areas they may cause
scratch the paint.
 If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, respiratory harm.
 Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
materials are well packaged and sealed.
the paint finish. PLASTIC A ND C OATED PARTS
 If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
CAUTION! consider mud or stone shields behind each Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
wheel.
 Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate- CAUTION! 8
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder  Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. soon as possible. An authorized dealer has  Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
touch up paint to match the color of your lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
 Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi vehicle. plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
of paint and decals. away immediately.
 Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster NOTE: GLASS SURFACES

Lenses If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
The lenses in front of the instruments in this transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning designed for easy cleaning, and the manufacturer commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching recommends Mopar® total care leather cleaner use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
the plastic. applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution needed. electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean CAUTION! instruments that may scratch the elements.
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
LEATHER S URFACES Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended result.
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery.
227
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) BRAKE SYSTEM WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
instrument panel, visible through the windshield. systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
normal capability, the remaining system will still vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
function. However, there will be some loss of reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
overall braking effectiveness. You may notice should be torqued using a properly calibrated
increased pedal travel during application, greater torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential socket.
activation of the Brake System Warning Light.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), Lug Nut/Bolt **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/Bolt
the brakes will still function. However, the effort Torque Bolt Size Socket Size
required to brake the vehicle will be much greater
63 Ft-Lb
than that required with the power system
Vehicle Identification Number (86 N·m) Steel
operating.
Wheels Only
NOTE: 89 Ft-Lb M12 x 1.25 17 mm
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. (120 N·m)
Aluminum
Wheels Only 9
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
228 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to

mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
loose particles. While operating on gasoline with the
recommended octane, hearing a light knocking
sound from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see an authorized dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane
number lower than 87 can cause engine failure
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Torque Patterns Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt experience these symptoms, try another brand of
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Wheel Mounting Surface properly seated against the wheel.
2.4L E NGINE
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until WARNING!
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure This engine is designed to meet all
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the emissions regulations and provide
(do not insert it halfway). jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until excellent fuel economy and performance
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow when using high quality unleaded regular
this warning may result in personal injury. gasoline having a octane rating of 87 using the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of premium gasoline is
not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit
over regular gasoline in these engines.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 229
REFORMULATED G ASOLINE Problems that result from using gasoline CNG AND LP F UEL SYSTEM
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
Many areas of the country require the use of gasoline containing methanol are not the MODIFICATIONS
cleaner-burning gasoline referred to as responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or Modifications that allow the engine to run on
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline not be covered under New Vehicle Limited compressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended Warranty. (LP) may result in damage to the engine,
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
quality. E-85 U SAGE I N NON-F LEX FUEL that result from running CNG or LP are not the
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. V EHICLES responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
provide improved performance and durability of Warranty.
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15).
engine and fuel system components.
Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the MMT I N GASOLINE
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
oxygenates such as ethanol. that is blended into some gasoline to increase
symptoms:
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
CAUTION!  Operate in a lean mode. performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,  OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on. same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
 Poor engine performance.
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting reduces emissions system performance in some
 Poor cold start and cold drivability. vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed  Increased risk for fuel system component corro- gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The
sion. MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on 9
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask a
observe pump labels as they should clearly gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
communicate if a fuel contains greater than MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
15% ethanol (E-15). reformulated gasoline.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL FUEL S YSTEM CAUTIONS CAUTION!

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper  The use of fuel additives, which are now being
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, CAUTION!
sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
corrosion, and stability additives are Follow these guidelines to maintain your mended. Most of these products contain high
recommended. Using gasolines that have these vehicle’s performance: concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce damage or vehicle performance problems
 The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline engine performance and damage the emis- tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
contains a higher level of detergents to sions control system. turer and may void or not be covered under
further aide in minimizing engine and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
fuel system deposits. When available,  An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
the usage of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline is malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent NOTE:
recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list
burning odor or some light smoke, your engine Intentional tampering with the emissions control
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may system can result in civil penalties being assessed
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents against you.
require immediate service. Contact an autho-
should be avoided. Many of these materials
rized dealer for service assistance.
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can (Continued)
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 231
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L Engine 16 Gallons 60.5 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4L Engine 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4L Engine 7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Engine Coolant (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395 such as
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine 9
Mopar®, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter Filter is unavailable, only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally
compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
 Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
 This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not recommended.
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent.
Automatic Transmission
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
We recommend you use Mopar® DOT 4.
Brake Master Cylinder The fluid must be changed every 24 months. This interval is time based only,
mileage intervals do not apply.
Use Pentosin CHF 11S power steering fluid meeting the manufacturer
Power Steering Reservoir
Material Standard MS-11655.
233
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Any communication to the FCA US LLC's customer
center should include the following information:
FOR YOUR VEHICLE FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally  Owner's name and address
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
 Owner's telephone number (mobile, home and
PREPARE F OR T HE APPOINTMENT happy with our products and services.
office)
All work to be performed may not be covered by the Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the  Authorized dealer name
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your  Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you  Vehicle delivery date and mileage
clue to the current problem. get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC’s
authorized dealers have the facilities, FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
PREPARE A L IST factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed P.O. Box 21–8004
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the correctly and in a timely manner. Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your This is why you should always talk to an authorized Phone: (866) 726-4636
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
resolved with this process.
FCA C ANADA INC. C USTOMER CENTER
BE R EASONABLE WITH REQUESTS  If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk P.O. Box 1621
If you list a number of items and you must have to the general manager or owner of the autho- Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the rized dealer. They want to know if you need
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
situation with the service advisor and list the items assistance.
French
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you  If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the 10
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges concern, you may contact FCA US LLC’s
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to customer center.
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
234 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MEXICO Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that We appreciate that you have made a major
require assistance can use the special needs relay investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY authorized dealer has also made a major
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, investment in facilities, tools, and training to
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay assure that you are absolutely delighted with the
Mexico, D.F.
Service operator. ownership experience.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568 SERVICE CONTRACT WARNING!
You may have purchased a service contract for a
PUERTO R ICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
FCA Caribbean LLC unexpected repairs after the FCA US LLC's New vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
P.O. Box 191857 Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® known to the State of California to cause cancer
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
San Juan 00919-1857 extended protection plans authorized, endorsed addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
Phone: (866) 726-4636 and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional certain products of component wear contain, or
Fax: (787) 782-3345 protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you emit, chemicals known to the State of California
purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner reproductive harm.
HEARING O R S PEECH I MPAIRED Identification Card in the mail within three weeks
of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
(TDD/TTY) questions about the service contract, call FCA US WARRANTY INFORMATION
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, LLC's Service Contract National Customer Hotline
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
FCA US LLC has installed special Telecommu- at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
nication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
this vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/
its customer center. Any hearing or speech French).
om for further information.
impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United See the Warranty Information for the terms and
contract you may have purchased from another
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA
dialing 1-800-380-2479. applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further information.
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 235
For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
further information. may open an investigation, and if it finds Investigations and Recalls at
Use this QR code to access your that a safety defect exists in a group of 1-800-333-0510 or go to
digital experience. vehicles, it may order a recall and wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA PCDB-BDPP.
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
dealer or FCA US LLC. To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below.
MOPAR® PARTS To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at Service Manuals
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your 1-800-424-9153); or go to http:// complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
www.safercar.gov; or write to: system, and/or components and is written in
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain
straightforward language with illustrations,
its original condition. Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
diagrams, and charts.
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
information about motor vehicle safety Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
I N T HE 50 U NITED STATES AND diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
from http://www.safercar.gov.
WASHINGTON, D.C. manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
I N C ANADA computer-controlled vehicle systems and features.
If you believe that your vehicle has a They show exactly how to find and correct
defect that could cause a crash or cause If you believe that your vehicle has a problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
injury or death, you should immediately safety defect, you should contact the drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and
inform the National Highway Traffic Customer Service Department a complete list of all tools and equipment. 10
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in immediately. Canadian customers who To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
addition to notifying FCA US LLC. wish to report a safety defect to the Procedure manuals, visit:
Canadian government should contact www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
236 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Owner's Manuals This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with and with Innovation, Science and Economic siguientes dos condiciones:
the assistance of service and engineering Development Canada license-exempt RSS 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA standard(s). Operation is subject to the following cause interferencia perjudicial y
vehicles. two conditions:
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
To access your Owner's Information online, visit 1. This device may not cause harmful cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
www.mopar.com/om (US) or interference, and pueda causar su operación no deseada.
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). 2. This device must accept any interference
Or received, including interference that may NOTE:
cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved
Call Tech Authority toll free at: by the party responsible for compliance could void
 1-800-890-4038 (US) Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
Information Books can be ordered through
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
Archway at:
conditions suivantes:
 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
GENERAL INFORMATION 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
TMB2 brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
The following regulatory statement applies to brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
TMB2 devices equipped in this vehicle: le fonctionnement.
FCC ID: Y70VP2REFRESH
IC: 7812H-VP2REFRESH
237
INDEX
A Alarm Belts, Seat .................................................... 163
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............195 Security Alarm .............................................13 Bluetooth
Additives, Fuel ...............................................230 Alterations/Modifications Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................107 Vehicle........................................................... 7 Or Audio Device After Pairing................ 103
Air Bag Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 194, 231 Body Builders Guide........................................... 7
Air Bag Operation ......................................144 Disposal ................................................... 196 Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................ 192
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................145 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 129 B-Pillar Location ............................................ 213
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 148, 183 Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................................48 Brake Assist System ..................................... 130
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................183 Assist, Hill Start............................................. 131 Brake Fluid .................................................... 232
Front Air Bag .............................................143 Audio Settings ..................................................95 Brake System ....................................... 196, 227
If Deployment Occurs ................................148 Audio Systems (Radio) .....................................77 Anti-Lock (ABS) ......................................... 129
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................145 Auto Down Power Windows .............................35 Fluid Check ...................................... 197, 232
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............149 Automatic Transmission ........................... 56, 57 Master Cylinder ........................................ 197
Maintenance .............................................149 Adding Fluid ..................................... 198, 232 Parking ........................................................55
Transporting Pets ......................................163 Fluid And Filter Change ............................ 198 Warning Light...............................................46
Air Bag Light ...........................................46, 164 Fluid Change ............................................ 198 Brake, Parking .................................................55
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Fluid Level Check ............................ 197, 198 Brake/Transmission Interlock ..........................57
Filter) .............................................................191 Fluid Type ........................................ 197, 232 Bulb Replacement ........................................ 205
Air Conditioner Maintenance .........................191 Special Additives ...................................... 197 Bulbs, Light .......................................... 165, 205
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 191, 192 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........33
Air Conditioner System ..................................191 Axle Fluid ...................................................... 232 C
Air Conditioning Filter ...................................... 32 Camera, Rear ...................................................66
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips................ 31, 32 B Capacities, Fluid............................................ 231
Air Filter .........................................................191 Battery ....................................................46, 189 Caps, Filler
Air Pressure Charging System Light .................................46 Fuel..............................................................67 11
Tires ..........................................................216 Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................11 Oil (Engine) ............................................... 188
238
Power Steering ............................................ 61 Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 220 Displayed

Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................195 Contract, Service .......................................... 234 Values ..........................................................45
Car Washes ...................................................225 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 195 Disposal
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................. 165, 166 Cooling System ............................................. 194 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 196
Cargo Area Cover ............................................. 38 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 195 Disturb .......................................................... 106
Cargo Compartment ........................................ 38 Coolant Level ............................................ 196 Door Ajar ..........................................................47
Cargo Tie-Downs .............................................. 38 Cooling Capacity ....................................... 231 Door Ajar Light .................................................47
Certification Label ........................................... 68 Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 196 Door Locks .......................................................13
Chains, Tire....................................................222 Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 194 Doors ...............................................................13
Changing A Flat Tire .......................................167 Inspection........................................ 194, 196 Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................................17
Chart, Tire Sizing............................................210 Points To Remember ................................ 196 Driving
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Pressure Cap ............................................ 195 Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Light) ............................................................... 52 Radiator Cap ............................................ 195 Standing Water .......................................75
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..................163 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..... 194, 231
Checks, Safety ...............................................163 Corrosion Protection ..................................... 224 E
Child Restraint ...............................................150 Cruise Light ......................................................51 Electric Brake Control System ....................... 130
Child Restraints Customer Assistance .................................... 233 Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................25
Booster Seats............................................152 Customer Programmable Features ..................78 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........33
Child Seat Installation ..................... 159, 162 Cybersecurity ...................................................77 Electronic Range Select (ERS) .........................60
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .....157 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................... 130
Infant And Child Restraints .......................151 D Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........47
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ...............156 Defroster, Windshield ................................... 164 Emergency, In Case Of
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ..154 Deleting A Phone .......................................... 103 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ..................... 181
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........152 Diagnostic System, Onboard ............................51 Jacking...................................................... 167
Seating Positions ......................................153 Dipsticks Jump Starting ........................................... 177
Clean Air Gasoline .........................................229 Oil (Engine) ............................................... 189 Towing ...................................................... 182
Cleaning Power Steering ............................................61 Emission Control System Maintenance............52
Wheels ......................................................222 Disable Vehicle Towing ................................. 182 Engine ........................................................... 188
Climate Control ................................................ 29 Disconnecting ............................................... 103 Air Cleaner ................................................ 191
Cold Weather Operation .................................. 53 Block Heater ................................................54
239
Break-In Recommendations ........................ 55 Flashers G

Checking Oil Level .....................................189 Hazard Warning ........................................ 167 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ..................................67
Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................................231 Turn Signals .......................................51, 165 Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................. 228
Cooling ......................................................194 Flooded Engine Starting...................................54 Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 229
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 165, 166 Fluid Capacities ............................................ 231 Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 229
Fails To Start ............................................... 54 Fluid Leaks ................................................... 165 Gear Ranges ....................................................58
Flooded, Starting ......................................... 54 Fluid Level Checks Gear Selector Override .................................. 180
Jump Starting ............................................177 Brake ........................................................ 197 Glass Cleaning .............................................. 226
Oil .................................................... 190, 231 Engine Oil ................................................. 189 Gross Axle Weight Rating ..........................68, 69
Oil Filler Cap ..............................................188 Power Steering ............................................61 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .....................68, 69
Oil Filter .....................................................191 Fluid, Brake .................................................. 232 Guide
Oil Selection .................................... 190, 231 Fog Lights ........................................................26 Body Builders................................................. 7
Oil Synthetic ..............................................191 Fold-Flat Seats .................................................17 GVWR ...............................................................68
Overheating ...............................................179 Four-Way Hazard Flasher .............................. 167
Starting ....................................................... 53 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................................ 181 H
Enhanced Accident Response Fuel ............................................................... 228 Hazard
Feature ................................................ 148, 183 Additives ................................................... 230 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Ethanol ..........................................................229 Clean Air ................................................... 229 Standing Water .......................................75
Exhaust Gas Cautions.......................... 165, 166 Ethanol ..................................................... 229 Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 167
Exhaust System ................................... 165, 193 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................................67 Head Restraints ...............................................20
Exterior Lights .........................................25, 165 Gasoline ................................................... 228 Headlights
Materials Added ....................................... 230 Cleaning.................................................... 224
F Methanol .................................................. 229 Passing ........................................................26
Filters Octane Rating.................................. 228, 231 Switch ..........................................................25
Air Cleaner.................................................191 Specifications ........................................... 231 Heated Seats ...................................................20
Air Conditioning ........................................... 32 Tank Capacity ........................................... 231 Heater, Engine Block........................................54
Engine Oil ........................................ 191, 231 Fuses ............................................................ 199 Hill Start Assist .............................................. 131
Engine Oil Disposal ...................................191 11
240
Hitches Jacking And Tire Changing ............................ 167 Exterior .............................................. 25, 165
Trailer Towing .............................................. 70 Jump Starting ............................................... 177 Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 167
Hood Prop ........................................................ 37 Headlights ...................................................25
Hood Release .................................................. 37 K Interior .........................................................27
Key Fob Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........49
I Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............11 Park ......................................................26, 51
Ignition ............................................................ 12 Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Passing ........................................................26
Key ....................................................... 10, 12 Entry) ...............................................................11 Seat Belt Reminder .....................................48
Switch ......................................................... 12 Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Service ...................................................... 205
Ignition Key Removal ....................................... 12 Entry) ...............................................................11 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............. 132
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) .................................. 11 Keys .................................................................10 Traction Control ........................................ 131
Inside Rearview Mirror ..................................... 23 Replacement ...............................................11 Turn Signals ....................................... 51, 165
Instrument Cluster .................................... 40, 41 Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................................11 Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ................................................ 51 Descriptions .....................................47, 51
Display ........................................................ 41 L Loading Vehicle .........................................68, 69
Display Controls .......................................... 41 Lane Change Assist .........................................27 Capacities ....................................................69
Engine Oil Reset .......................................... 42 Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 137 Tires .......................................................... 213
Menu Items ................................................. 43 Latches ......................................................... 165 Locks
Instrument Panel ............................................. 40 Hood ............................................................37 Power Door ..................................................13
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ....................226 Leaks, Fluid .................................................. 165 Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 132
Interior And Instrument Lights ......................... 27 Life Of Tires................................................... 218 Lubrication, Body .......................................... 192
Interior Appearance Care...............................225 Light Bulbs ........................................... 165, 205 Lug Nuts/Bolts .............................................. 227
Interior Lights .................................................. 27 Lights ............................................................ 165
iPod Control ..................................................... 33 Air Bag ................................................46, 164 M
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ................................... 33 Brake Assist Warning ............................... 131 Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 189
Bluetooth Streaming Audio ......................... 33 Brake Warning .............................................46 Maintenance Schedule ................................. 184
Bulb Replacement .................................... 205 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
J Cruise ..........................................................51 Engine) ......................................................49, 52
Jack Location .................................................167 Daytime Running .........................................26 Manual
Jack Operation ...............................................167 Engine Temperature Warning ......................47 Service ...................................................... 235
241
Master Cylinder Disposal ................................................... 191 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 140
Brakes .......................................................197 Filter ................................................ 191, 231 Preparation For Jacking ................................ 167
Methanol .......................................................229 Filter Disposal........................................... 191 Pretensioners
Mirrors ............................................................. 23 Identification Logo .................................... 190 Seat Belts ................................................. 140
Electric Powered ......................................... 25 Materials Added To .................................. 191
Electric Remote ........................................... 25 Pressure Warning Light ...............................47 R
Exterior Folding ........................................... 24 Recommendation ............................ 190, 231 Radial Ply Tires.............................................. 217
Outside ........................................................ 24 Synthetic .................................................. 191 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............ 195
Rearview ..................................................... 23 Viscosity ................................................... 231 Radio Operation ............................................ 128
Modifications/Alterations Onboard Diagnostic System.............................51 Rear Camera ....................................................66
Vehicle .......................................................... 7 Operating Precautions .....................................51 Rear ParkSense System...................................63
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.......................132 Operator Manual Recreational Towing.........................................74
Mopar Parts ...................................................235 Owner's Manual ........................................ 235 Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 229
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................24 Refrigerant .................................................... 192
N Overheating, Engine...................................... 179 Release, Hood..................................................37
New Vehicle Break-In Period............................ 55 Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 136
P Remote Keyless Entry
O Paint Care ..................................................... 224 Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............11
Occupant Restraints ......................................135 Parking Brake ..................................................55 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ....... 126
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 228, 231 ParkSense System, Rear .................................63 Replacement Bulbs ....................................... 205
Oil Change Indicator ........................................ 42 Passing Light ...................................................26 Replacement Keys ...........................................11
Reset ........................................................... 42 Personal Settings .............................................78 Replacement Tires ........................................ 218
Oil Filter, Change ...........................................191 Pets .............................................................. 163 Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 235
Oil Filter, Selection.........................................191 Phone Mode ....................................................99 Restraints, Child............................................ 150
Oil Pressure Light ............................................ 47 Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 213 Restraints, Head ..............................................20
Oil Reset .......................................................... 42 Power Rotation, Tires ............................................... 222
Oil, Engine ........................................... 190, 231 Mirrors .........................................................25
Capacity ....................................................231 Steering .......................................................61 S 11
Checking ...................................................189 Windows ......................................................35 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 163
Dipstick .....................................................189 Power Steering Fluid ..................................... 232 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...................... 165
242
Safety Defects, Reporting ..............................235 Security System ...............................................13 Cold Weather ...............................................53
Safety Information, Tire .................................209 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 231 Engine Fails To Start ....................................54
Safety Tips .....................................................163 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................11 Steering ...........................................................17
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................................165 Service Assistance ........................................ 233 Power...........................................................61
Satellite Radio ................................................. 91 Service Contract ........................................... 234 Tilt Column...................................................17
Schedule, Maintenance .................................184 Service Manuals ........................................... 235 Wheel, Tilt ....................................................17
Seat Belts ............................................ 136, 163 Settings, Audio .................................................95 Steering Wheel Audio Controls...................... 126
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...........................139 Shift Lever Override ...................................... 180 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ......139 Shifting Controls ........................................................ 126
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Automatic Transmission ..............................57 Storage ............................................................32
Anchorage .............................................139 Shoulder Belts .............................................. 137 Storage, Vehicle ..................................... 31, 224
Child Restraints .........................................150 Signals, Turn ...........................................51, 165 Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 224
Energy Management Feature ....................140 Sirius Satellite Radio........................................91 Sun Visor Extension .........................................24
Front Seat .............................. 136, 137, 138 Favorites......................................................94 Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 132
Inspection .................................................163 Replay .........................................................93 Symbol Glossary................................................. 8
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ....................138 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 191
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...................139 Browse in SXM ............................................94
Lap/Shoulder Belts ...................................137 Favorites......................................................94 T
Operating Instructions ...............................138 Replay .........................................................93 Telescoping Steering Column ...........................17
Pregnant Women ......................................140 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 222 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................................38
Pretensioners ............................................140 Snow Tires .................................................... 220 Tilt Steering Column .........................................17
Rear Seat ..................................................137 Spare Tires .......................................... 220, 221 Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 213
Reminder ...........................................48, 136 Specifications Tire Markings ................................................ 209
Seat Belt Pretensioner ..............................140 Fuel (Gasoline) ......................................... 231 Tire Safety Information.................................. 209
Untwisting Procedure ................................139 Oil ............................................................. 231 Tire Service Kit .............................................. 175
Seats ............................................................... 17 Speed Control Tires .................................. 165, 216, 220, 223
Adjustment .................................................. 17 Cancel .........................................................63 Aging (Life Of Tires) ................................... 218
Heated ........................................................ 20 Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........................61 Air Pressure .............................................. 216
Rear Folding ................................................ 17 Starting ............................................................53 Chains ...................................................... 222
Tilting .......................................................... 17 Automatic Transmission ..............................53 Changing .................................................. 167
243
Compact Spare .........................................220 Traction ............................................................75 Uconnect Phone ................................... 101, 102
General Information ........................ 216, 220 Traction Control ............................................ 132 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
High Speed ................................................217 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 132 Call Currently In Progress ..................... 106
Inflation Pressure ......................................216 Trailer Towing ..................................................69 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Jacking ......................................................167 Hitches ........................................................70 No Call Currently In Progress ................ 105
Life Of Tires ...............................................218 Minimum Requirements ..............................71 Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 109
Load Capacity............................................213 Tips..............................................................73 Call Continuation ...................................... 107
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..48, 132 Trailer And Tongue Weight...........................71 Call Controls ............................................. 105
Quality Grading..........................................223 Wiring ..........................................................73 Call Termination ....................................... 107
Radial ........................................................217 Trailer Towing Guide ........................................71 Cancel Command ..................................... 101
Replacement .............................................218 Trailer Weight...................................................71 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Rotation ....................................................222 Transmission ...................................................57 Or Audio Device After Pairing................ 103
Safety .............................................. 209, 216 Automatic ....................................56, 57, 197 Help Command ......................................... 101
Sizes..........................................................210 Fluid ......................................................... 232 Join Calls .................................................. 106
Snow Tires .................................................220 Maintenance ............................................ 197 Making A Phone Or Audio Device
Spare Tires ...................................... 220, 221 Transporting Pets.......................................... 163 A Favorite ............................................. 103
Spinning ....................................................218 Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 218 Making A Second Call While Current
Trailer Towing .............................................. 72 Trip Computer ...........................................44, 45 Call Is In Progress ................................. 106
Tread Wear Indicators ...............................218 Turn Signals .....................................................51 Managing Your Favorites .......................... 104
Wheel Nut Torque .....................................227 Natural Speech ......................................... 101
To Open Hood .................................................. 37 U Operation .................................................. 100
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ......................... 71 Uconnect Overview ......................................................99
Towing ............................................................. 69 Phone Call Features ................................. 104 Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Disabled Vehicle........................................182 Things You Should Know About Your Phone ................................................... 101
Guide........................................................... 71 Uconnect Phone ................................... 107 Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio
Recreational ................................................ 74 Device .................................................. 102
Weight ......................................................... 71
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................... 74 11
244
Phonebook Download ...............................104 W Windows ..........................................................35

Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ...............106 Warning Lights Power...........................................................35
Power-Up ...................................................109 Blue .............................................................51 Windshield Defroster .................................... 164
Recent Calls ..............................................105 Green ..........................................................51 Windshield Washers ........................................28
Redial ........................................................107 Red ..............................................................46 Fluid.......................................................... 189
To Remove A Favorite ...............................104 Yellow ..........................................................48 Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 192
Toggling Between Calls .............................106 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Windshield Wipers ................................. 28, 189
Touch-Tone Number Entry .........................105 Descriptions)....................................................50 Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 192
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ..107 Warning Lights And Messages .........................45 Wrecker Towing............................................. 182
Voice Command ........................................107 Warranty Information .................................... 234
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...........................223 Washers, Windshield ..............................28, 189
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................139 Washing Vehicle ........................................... 225
Water
V Driving Through ...........................................75
Vehicle Certification Label ............................... 68 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......................... 222
Vehicle Loading ...............................68, 69, 213 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 222
Vehicle Maintenance .....................................190 Wind Buffeting .................................................36
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...................... 7 Window Fogging ...............................................32
Vehicle Storage ......................................31, 224 Window Lockout Switch ...................................36
Voice Command .............................................. 22
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................ 22
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving
itself to install them on products previously manufactured. is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
substitution therefore. while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. reference for common questions.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway transportation.
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except WARNING
as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
2021 RAM PROMASTER CITY
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
U.S. CANADA
`
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
RAM PROMASTER CITY
MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
20 21 OWNER’ S M ANUAL
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Second Edition
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 21_VM_OM_EN_USC

Ram Promaster City: Download The Most Up-To-Date Owner'S Manual, Radio and Warranty Books

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ram Promaster City: Download The Most Up-To-Date Owner'S Manual, Radio and Warranty Books

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ram Promaster City: Download The Most Up-To-Date Owner'S Manual, Radio and Warranty Books

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021 RAM PROMASTER CITY

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 10 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 40 3

4 STARTING AND OPERATING .................................................................................................53 4

6 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 129 6

INTRODUCTION UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ........................22 INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............... 32

TIRES .....................................................................209 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SYMBOLS KEY VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

FOOTNOTE VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

SYMBOL GLOSSARY Red Warning Lights

Yellow Warning Lights Green Indicator Lights

Low Fuel Warning Light Turn Signal Indicator Lights 1

Generic Warning Light Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light

Vehicle Security Warning Light Cruise Control Indicator Light

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)

High Beam Indicator Light

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 11

Programming And Requesting Additional SENTRY KEY

12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13

14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15

Closing: The device is released and the doors can be

Key Emergency Lock Device

16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17

STEERING WHEEL WARNING! MANUAL A DJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Forward And Rearward Adjustment Height Adjustment — If Equipped Recliner Adjustment

Height Adjustment Lever

Adjustment Bar Recliner Knob

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

Lumbar Support — If Equipped 2. Slowly fold down the seatback.

FOLDING REAR SEAT — I F EQUIPPED

Lumbar Control Knob

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

HEATED S EATS — IF E QUIPPED NOTE: HEAD R ESTRAINTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

Front Adjustment Rear Adjustment — If Equipped

WARNING! Center Head Restraint

Outboard Head Restraint

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Front Removal Rear Removal — If Equipped UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

BASIC VOICE COMMANDS MIRRORS

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! Folding Mirrors

Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside CAUTION!

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

Manual Outside Mirrors — If Equipped

Power Mirror Controls Multifunction Lever

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

DAYTIME RUNNING L IGHTS (DRLS) — FLASH-TO-P ASS Deactivation

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

LANE CHANGE ASSIST In auto-mode, the light comes on automatically

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE